morpheus - e-univercity.com · 2011-09-27 · morpheus is a registered trade-mark of e-mu systems,...

284

Upload: others

Post on 17-Jun-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,
Page 2: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

This product is covered under one or more of the following U. S. patents: 3,969,682;3,986,423; 4,404,529; 4,506,579; 4,699,038; 4,987,600; 5,013,105; 5,072,645;5,111,727 and foreign patents and/or pending patents. Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc.

Important Notice:In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit, the serial number sticker mustbe intact and you must have a sales receipt or other proof of purchase. If there is no serialnumber sticker on Morpheus, please contact E-mu Systems at once.

PRINTED AND MADE IN THE USA

Manual - Riley Smith

E-mu World HeadquartersE-mu Systems, Inc. U.S.A.P.O. Box 660015Scotts Valley, CA USA95067–0015Telephone: 831-438-1921Fax: 831-438-8612

Europe, Africa, Middle EastE-mu Systems, Ltd.Suite 6, Adam FergusonHouseEskmills Industrial ParkMusselburgh, East LothianScotland, EH21 7PQTelephone: 44-31-653-6556Fax: 44-31-665-0473

MORPHEUSOperation Manual© 1993 E-mu Systems, Inc.All Rights Reserved

• FI420 Rev. C

Page 3: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

WARNING: READ THIS FIRST!

This symbol is intended to alertthe user to the presence ofimportant operating andmaintenance (servicing)instructions in the literatureaccompanying the appliance.

This symbol is intended to alertthe user to the presence ofuninsulated dangerous voltagewithin the product's enclosurethat may be of sufficientmagnitude to constitute a risk oelectric shock to persons.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSUse in countries other than the U.S.A. may require the use of a different linecord or attachment plug, or both. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,refer servicing to qualified service personnel. To reduce risk of fire or electricshock do not expose this product to rain or moisture.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONSThis product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down,grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current, reducing therisk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord having an equip-ment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be pluggedinto an appropriate outlet properly installed and grounded in accordancewith all local codes and ordinances.

DANGERImproper connection of equipment grounding conductor can result in therisk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service personnelif you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded. Do notmodify the plug provided with this product — if it will not fit the outlet,have a proper outlet installed by a qualified technician.

CAUTIONIf the Morpheus (model number 9053), is rack mounted, a standard 19-inchopen frame rack must be used.

USER-MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS1. Morpheus should be kept clean and dust free. Periodically wipe the unit

with a clean, lint free cloth. Do not use solvents or cleaners.

2. There are no user lubrication or adjustment requirements.

3. Refer all other servicing to qualified service personnel.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELEC-TRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS

WARNING; When using electric products, basic precautions shouldalways be followed, including the following:

1. Read all instructions before using Morpheus.

2. To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is necessary when Morpheusis used near children.

3. Do not use Morpheus near water — for example near a bathtub, washbowl,kitchen sink, in a wet basement, on a wet bar, or near or in a swimmingpool.

i

In this document, whenever theword “Morpheus” is mentionedwe are referring to theMorpheus Synthesizer by E-muSystems, Inc.

Page 4: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

4. Morpheus should be situated so that its location or position does notinterfere with its proper ventilation.

5. Morpheus should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heatregisters, fireplaces, stoves, or ovens.

6. Morpheus should only be connected to a power supply of the type de-scribed in the operating instructions and as marked on the product.

7. This product, in combination with an amplifier, headphones, and speak-ers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause full orpartial hearing loss or damaged equipment. Do not operate for longperiods of time at high volume levels or at a level that is uncomfortable.Additionally, care must be taken when programming any of the filterscontained herein using extreme operating parameters. This action couldalso produce signals which result in unacceptable high sound levels asnoted previously. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing of the earsconsult your physician.

8. Morpheus may be equipped with a polarized line plug (one blade widerthat the other). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert this pluginto the outlet, do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug. Contact anelectrician to replace your obsolete outlet.

9. The power supply cord of Morpheus should be unplugged from the outletwhen left unused for a long period of time.

10. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilledinto the enclosure of Morpheus through openings.

11. The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or

C. The product has been exposed to rain; or

D. The product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits amarked change in performance; or

E. The product has been dropped or the enclosure damaged.

12. All servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

ii

Page 5: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

CONTENTS

iii

INTRODUCTION & BASIC SETUP 1

Introduction ........................................................................................... 3Getting Started ...................................................................................... 4Connection Instructions ...................................................................... 5Background - About Sampling .......................................................... 9

BASIC OPERATION 11

Main Controls ...................................................................................... 12Selecting MIDI Channels ................................................................... 14Selecting Presets/Hyperpresets ......................................................... 14Adjusting Volume & Pan Position ................................................... 14Memory Card ....................................................................................... 15Midimap Selection .............................................................................. 15Multi-Timbral Operation ................................................................... 16Playing the Demo Sequences ............................................................ 16

MASTER MENU 17

Enabling the Master Menu ............................................................... 19Master Tune ......................................................................................... 19Transpose ............................................................................................. 19User Key Tuning .................................................................................. 20Global Bend ......................................................................................... 20Global Velocity Curve ........................................................................ 20MIDI Mode ........................................................................................... 22MIDI Mode Change ............................................................................ 22MIDI Program Change Map ............................................................ 23MIDI Controller Assign ...................................................................... 24MIDI Footswitch Control ......................................................... 24Send MIDI Data .................................................................................. 24Sysex Packet Delay ................................................................. 25Proteus Sysex ......................................................................... 26Auto Select ............................................................................ 26Compare Mode ...................................................................... 26Viewing Angle ...................................................................................... 26

MIDIMAP MENU 27

The Midimap ....................................................................................... 29Enabling the Midimap Menu ........................................................... 30Midimap Select ...................................................................... 30Midimap Name .................................................................... 31Program to Channel Assign .................................................. 31

Page 6: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

CONTENTS

iv

MIDIMAP MENU (cont)

Volume, Pan & Output Mix ..................................................... 31MIDI Enables ........................................................................ 33Bank Select ............................................................................ 33Program Map Select .............................................................. 34FX A ..................................................................................... 34FX B ..................................................................................... 35FX Amount ............................................................................ 35FX Output Select .................................................................... 36Save Midimap ....................................................................... 36

EFFECTS SECTION 37

Where are the Effects? ............................................................ 39Effects Output Routing ........................................................... 40Morpheus Effects Bus Architecture .......................................... 40Effect Programming Instructions .............................................. 41Reverb ................................................................................... 42Stereo Flanger ....................................................................... 46Stereo Phaser ......................................................................... 48Stereo Chorus ........................................................................ 49Stereo Delay .......................................................................... 50Stereo Cross Delay ................................................................. 51Stereo Echo ............................................................................ 52“B” Effects ............................................................................. 53Stereo Fuzz ............................................................................ 54Ring Modulator ..................................................................... 55

HYPERPRESET MENU 57

The Hyperpreset .................................................................................. 59Enabling the Hyperpreset Menu ............................................. 59Hyperpreset Name ................................................................ 60Preset to Zone Assignment ..................................................... 60Zone Volume and Pan ........................................................... 61Zone Key Range .................................................................... 61Zone Velocity Range .............................................................. 62Zone Velocity Offset ............................................................... 63Zone Transpose .................................................................... 63Zone Pitch Tune.................................................................... 63Hyperpreset Portamento Mode.............................................. 64Free-Run Function Generator ................................................. 64Save Hyperpreset ................................................................... 66

Page 7: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

PRESET PROGRAMMING 67

Starting to Program .............................................................. 69Modulation .......................................................................................... 70Modulation Sources ........................................................................... 71Footswitch Modulation .......................................................... 72Midipatch .............................................................................. 72Envelope Generators .......................................................................... 73Low Frequency Oscillators ................................................................ 75Function Generators .............................................................. 76Filter Modulation ................................................................... 84Parametric Filters ................................................................... 87The Morpheus Filter ............................................................... 88The Z-Plane Filter .................................................................... 89Another View ........................................................................... 92Morpheus Signal Flow ........................................................... 93Note-On Modulation Control ................................................. 94Realtime Modulation Control ................................................. 95Key Number ........................................................................... 96Velocity Curves ...................................................................... 96MIDI Realtime Controls .......................................................... 97

PRESET MENU 99

Enabling the Preset Menu .................................................... 101Preset Name ........................................................................ 102Primary Instrument .............................................................. 102Secondary Instrument .......................................................... 102Volume ................................................................................ 103Pan ..................................................................................... 103Key Range ........................................................................... 103Primary Key Range .............................................................. 104Secondary Key Range ........................................................... 104Transpose ............................................................................ 105Coarse Pitch Tuning............................................................. 105Fine Pitch Tuning ................................................................. 105Alternate Envelope On/Off ................................................... 105Primary Alternate Envelope Parameters ................................ 106Secondary Alternate Envelope Parameters ............................ 106Double + Detune ................................................................. 106Sound Delay ........................................................................ 107Sound Start ......................................................................... 107

CONTENTS

v

Page 8: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

PRESET MENU (cont)

Sound Reverse...................................................................... 107Nontranspose ...................................................................... 108Loop Enable ....................................................................... 108Loop Offset .......................................................................... 108Solo Mode ........................................................................... 109Solo Mode Priority .............................................................. 110Portamento Rate ................................................................ 110Portamento Shape .............................................................. 110Portamento Mode............................................................... 111Crossfade Mode .................................................................. 111Crossfade Direction .............................................................. 112Crossfade Balance and Amount .......................................... 112Cross-switch Point .............................................................. 113Primary Filter Type .............................................................. 113Secondary Filter Type .......................................................... 113Filter Level ........................................................................... 113Morph Offset ...................................................................... 114Filter Frequency Tracking ..................................................... 114Filter Transform 2 ............................................................... 115Filter Reverse ...................................................................... 116Auxiliary Envelope .............................................................. 116LFO 1 & 2 - Shape & Amount.............................................. 117LFO 1 & 2 - Rate, Delay & Variation .................................... 117Function Generator 1 and 2 ................................................. 118Note-On Modulation Control .............................................. 122Realtime Modulation Control .............................................. 123Footswitch Control .............................................................. 124Pitch Bend Range................................................................ 124Pressure Amount .................................................................. 124MIDI Controller Amount ..................................................... 124Velocity Curve ...................................................................... 125Keyboard Center .................................................................. 126Keyboard Tuning ................................................................ 126Mix Select ........................................................................... 127Save Preset .......................................................................... 127

CONTENTS

vi

Page 9: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

COPY MENU 129

Enabling the Copy Menu ..................................................... 131Copy Preset ......................................................................... 131Copy Layer .......................................................................... 132Copy Filter ........................................................................... 132Copy LFO ............................................................................... 132Copy Function Generator ..................................................... 133Copy Auxiliary Envelope ...................................................... 133Copy Note-On Control ......................................................... 133Copy Realtime Control ......................................................... 133Copy Hyperpreset ................................................................ 134Copy Zone ............................................................................. 134Copy Free-Run Function Generator ....................................... 134Copy Midimap ..................................................................... 134Copy Channel ...................................................................... 135Copy Effects ......................................................................... 135Copy Program Change Map.................................................. 135Copy Bank ........................................................................... 136

STEP-BY-STEP 137

Forward ................................................................................. 139Editing Presets ..................................................................... 139Starting From Scratch .......................................................... 140The Instrument ...................................................................... 140Volume .................................................................................. 141Pan ........................................................................................ 141Transpose .............................................................................. 141Coarse Tuning ....................................................................... 142Fine Tuning ........................................................................... 142Alternate Volume Envelope .................................................... 143Anatomy of an Envelope ....................................................... 144Sound Delay .......................................................................... 145Sound Start ........................................................................... 145Application: Sound Splicing................................................... 146Time to Save? ........................................................................ 147LFO Modulation .................................................................... 147Modulating Modulators ........................................................ 150The Morpheus Filter ............................................................... 151Just Do It ............................................................................... 152Filter Filosophy ...................................................................... 154Morphology........................................................................... 157

CONTENTS

vii

Page 10: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Using Morpheus with a Sequencer......................................... 158More Advanced Sequencing .................................................. 159

REFERENCE SECTION 161

Factory RAM Presets - Bank 0 ................................................ 162Factory ROM Presets - Bank 1................................................ 163Instrument Listing.................................................................. 164B3 Wave Diagrams ................................................................ 169Percussion Instrument Locations ........................................... 170Z-Plane Filter Descriptions ..................................................... 174Loop Offset Sample Locations................................................ 211Function Generator Curves .................................................... 214Function Generator, LFO & Envelope Specifications .............. 222Technical Specifications ......................................................... 223MIDI Implementation Chart .................................................. 224MIDI Specifications ................................................................ 225MIDI SysEx Tutorial ............................................................... 251

INDEX 255

CONTENTS

viii

Page 11: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

1Chapter 1: Basic Setup

INTRODUCTION& BASIC SETUP

Page 12: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual2

Page 13: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

3Chapter 1: Basic Setup

INTRODUCTION

MORPHEUS Z-PLANE SYNTHESIZERMorpheus is a completely new type of music synthesizer which repre-sents a major landmark in the evolution of electronic sound synthesis.

Many electronic instruments involve the technology of sampling,where sounds are digitally recorded and played back at differentpitches. Sampling has the advantage of highly accurate and realisticsound. One disadvantage of sampling is that once the sounds arerecorded, it is difficult to change them in any significant way.

Morpheus introduces the Z-Plane filter, which has the ability tosmoothly change its function over time. This ultra-powerful device canaccurately simulate the resonance of musical instruments, the humanvoice or create entirely new timbres. The Z-Plane filter is composed ofup to eight complex filters for unprecedented control over subtleaspects of the sound.

Morpheus contains eight megabytes (internally expandable to 16megabytes) of the highest quality 16 bit samples as the basis for itssounds. These sounds can be combined or spliced, modulated and thenshaped through one of 197 Z-Plane filters. Sampled sounds can now bere-shaped and expressively controlled.

The 16 bit sound samples are arranged into 256 preset locations, 128 ofwhich are user-programmable. 128 user-programmable Hyperpresetsallow ultra-flexible keyboard mapping of presets. The optional memorycard lets you create an expandable library of your favorite presets andhyperpresets.

Morpheus features two studio-quality effects processors with 28 differ-ent effects to choose from. Hyperpresets allow you to have up to 32different sounds on the keyboard at one time in any desired arrange-ment. Sounds can be placed side by side or layered with velocity con-trol. The ability to respond multi-timbrally to all 16 MIDI channelsmakes Morpheus ideally suited for multitrack sequencing and compos-ing using a MIDI sequencer.

Other features include 3 stereo outputs for individually processingsounds (also configurable as 6 polyphonic submixes with fully pro-grammable panning), integral sends and returns to allow the additionof external effects units without the need for a separate mixer, userdefinable alternate tuning, and of course, an extensive MIDIimplementation.

Page 14: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual4

GETTING STARTED

In it's most basic form, Morpheus is organized as shown in the dia-gram below. Complete acoustic instrument samples and electronicallycreated sounds are used as raw material to form Presets.

The Preset is a complete set of all program functions and combina-tions for a complete Morpheus sound. Each preset consists of one ortwo Instruments. An Instrument is a complete set of samples or adigital waveform which covers the entire keyboard range. An instru-ment can be assigned to each of the Primary and Secondary layers ofthe preset.

The primary and secondary layers of the preset are essentially twoinstruments with complete modulation controls. The memory is orga-nized into banks of 128 programmable RAM presets, unalterable ROMpresets and Hyperpresets.

A Hyperpreset is a combination of up to sixteen presets arrangedeither side by side on the keyboard (to create a keyboard split) or ontop of each other (to create a denser sound). Each preset in ahyperpreset is assigned to a keyboard Zone, with an associated keyrange, volume, pan, tuning and transpose setting. In addition, eachzone can be assigned to a velocity range so that different presets canplay depending on the key velocity. There are 128 Hyperpreset loca-tions available to store your own custom keyboard setups.

RAM Presets can bemoved, erased or modified asesired.

ROM Presets cannot bemoved or altered unless theyre first copied to a RAM

ocation.

Hyperpresets are groupsf presets arranged on theeyboard to form splits orayers.

Memory Card - Allowsou to easily load and savedditional Presets and

Hyperpresets.

Page 15: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

5Chapter 1: Basic Setup

CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS

• • • If Morpheus does notseem to be respondingcorrectly, make sure thatboth Morpheus and yourMIDI controller are set to thesame MIDI channel.

SETUP #1 BASIC SETUP

MIDI InMorpheus is controlled by MIDI messages received at the MIDI Inconnector. Connect the MIDI In of the Morpheus to the MIDIOut connector of a MIDI controller such as a MIDI keyboard,MIDI wind controller or MIDI guitar controller.

Audio OutputsMorpheus is a high quality, stereo audio device. In order to repro-duce its wide dynamic range and frequency response, use a highquality amplification and speaker system such as a keyboardamplifier or home stereo system. A stereo setup is highly desirablebecause of the added realism of stereophonic sound. Headphonescan be used if an amplifier and speaker system is not available.Plug stereo headphones into the headphone jack located on theleft side of the front panel. The Right Main output jack serves as amono output when the Left Main plug is not plugged in.

The headphone outputmonitors the main outputsonly. The submix outputs doNOT feed into the head-phone output.

Page 16: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual6

CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS

SETUP #2 STUDIO SETUP

MIDI InIn this setup, Morpheus is controlled by MIDI messages receivedat the MIDI In connector which have been routed by a MIDIswitcher. The MIDI switcher allows any MIDI controller such as aMIDI keyboard, MIDI wind controller or a computer to be easilyconnected.

MIDI OutThe MIDI Out jack is normally used to transmit MIDI SystemExclusive data to a computer or other device.

Audio OutputsMorpheus has three sets of programmable stereo outputs; Main,Sub 1, and Sub 2. Specific Morpheus presets (or MIDI channels)can be routed to one of these stereo pairs in order to be furtherprocessed or mixed separately.

Page 17: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

7Chapter 1: Basic Setup

CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS

SETUP #3 PERFORMANCE SETUP

MIDI InMorpheus is controlled by MIDI messages received at the MIDI Inconnector. Connect the MIDI In of Morpheus to the MIDI Outconnector of a MIDI controller such as a MIDI keyboard, MIDIwind controller or MIDI guitar controller.

MIDI ThruThe MIDI Thru jack is used to connect additional MIDI devicesonto the MIDI chain. MIDI Thru transmits an exact copy of themessages received at the MIDI In jack.

Audio OutputsEach of the Sub 1 and Sub 2 output jacks on the Morpheus arestereo jacks. The tip of each jack (accessed when a standard phoneplug is inserted) is the left or right output of that group. The Sub1 outputs

Page 18: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual8

CONNECTIONS

bypass the internal effects section. The Sub 2 outputs are fed from theeffects section. If a stereo plug is inserted, the Ring of the stereo plugserves as a signal Return which sums into the Main outputs.

Therefore, the Sub 1 and Sub 2 jacks can serve as effect sends andreturns in order to further process selected instruments and thenreturn them to the main mix.

The diagram shows the Sub 1 and Sub 2 jacks being used as send/returns in order to further process selected Morpheus presets withoutusing the effects bus on the mixing board. In a pinch, the effect re-turns could also be used to sum additional instruments into the mainoutputs.

POWER UP!The power switch is located on the right side of the front panel.Morpheus and its MIDI controller may be turned on in any order.When power is applied, the liquid crystal display will light, indicatingthat Morpheus is operating. You may have noticed that there is no110/220 Volt power selector switch on Morpheus.

Morpheus automatically switches itself for 110 or 220 Voltoperation.

The Sub 1 and Sub 2 jacks can be used as effect returns to the Main Outputs.

Morpheus Output Section

Page 19: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

9Chapter 1: Basic Setup

ABOUT SAMPLINGMorpheus utilizes digital recording of acoustic sounds for the basis ofeach Instrument. This is similar to a tape recorder except that insidethe Morpheus, the sounds are permanently recorded on digitalmemory chips.

Sound and instrument waveforms are first sampled into the EmulatorIII, our top of the line, 16 bit stereo digital sampler. After the soundsand waveforms have been truncated, looped and processed, they arepermanently encoded into the Morpheus ROM (Read Only Memory)chips.

Conceptually, the sampling process is very simple, as shown in theBasic Sampling System diagram. As a sound wave strikes the dia-phragm of a microphone, a corresponding voltage is generated. Tosample the sound, the voltage level is repeatedly measured over timeand the corresponding data values are stored in memory. To play thesound back, the numbers are read back out of memory, modified bythe Z-plane filter, converted back into voltages, then amplified and fedto a speaker which converts the voltage back into sound waves. Ofcourse, playing back 32 channels at different pitches tends to compli-cate matters, but this is basically how it works.

BACKGROUND

Page 20: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual10

Page 21: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 2: Basic Operation 11

BASICOPERATION

Page 22: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual12

MAIN CONTROLS

Volume ControlThis is the master volume control for all audio outputs. Note: Formaximum dynamic range, set this control at full level.

Card SlotThe card slot accepts RAM and ROM cards containing additionalpresets, hyperpresets and midimaps.

Master Menu Select ButtonThe Master menu contains global parameters which affect theentire machine. The LED to the left of the button indicates thatyou are in the Master menu.

Midimap Menu Select ButtonA Midimap is a set of parameters used to configure Morpheus toother MIDI gear such as a sequencer or keyboard setup. The 16Midimaps contain digital effects setting as well as assignments ofpresets/hyperpresets to MIDI channels. An LED to the left of thebutton indicates that you are working in the Midimap menu.

Preset Menu Select ButtonThe Preset menu is used when you want to create or modify apreset. The LED to the left of the button indicates that you areworking in the Preset menu. To Compare an edited preset with theunedited version, simply exit Preset Edit mode. The stored presetwill be heard whenever the main screen is selected. Changing thepreset will erase the edited version.

Hyperpreset Menu Select ButtonThe Hyperpreset menu is used to place presets at certain locationson the keyboard to create custom keyboard layouts. The LED tothe left of the button indicates that you are working in theHyperpreset menu.

Page 23: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 2: Basic Operation 13

••• The cursor can also bemoved bidirectionally usingthe data entry control whilethe right cursor button isheld down. (i.e. Press andhold the cursor button andturn the data entry knob.)

MAIN CONTROLS

Demo Sequence SelectMorpheus contains four play-only sequences to demonstrate therange of sounds. Press and hold the Midimap and the Hyperpresetbuttons simultaneously to select the Demo Sequence selectionscreen.

Cursor ControlThese buttons move the cursor to the next parameter on thedisplay in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. (The cursoris the little flashing line underneath one of the parameters in thedisplay.) Press either cursor control button repeatedly until thecursor is underneath the desired parameter.

Copy ButtonThe copy menu allows you to copy selected groups of parametersbetween Presets, Hyperpresets, and Midimaps.

Home/Enter ButtonThe Home/Enter button is used to confirm a particular operationor to return the cursor the “Home” position in the upper leftcorner. The LED flashes to indicate that Morpheus is waiting foryour response.

Data Entry ControlThe data entry control is a stepped, variable control which is usedto change parameter values. The control increments or decrementsthe current value one unit with each click. This control incorpo-rates acceleration (values advance faster if the control is turnedquickly).

Power SwitchSwitches AC power to Morpheus On and Off.

You must hold theMidimap and Hyperpresetbuttons for approximatelytwo seconds to start thedemo sequences.

Page 24: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual14

0

0

BASIC OPERATION

•• Channel Pan shouldormally be set to “P” unlessealtime control of panning isesired. If Pan is set to “0”, atereo preset will play in

mono.

• • If Morpheus is notesponding properly or playshe wrong preset, make surehat both Morpheus andour MIDI controller are seto the same MIDI channelnd that the MIDI Volume isurned up.

or more information aboutMIDI, see MIDI Realtime

ontrols on page 97.

MIDI Activity LEDIndicates that MIDI data is being received.

MIDI CHANNEL SELECTIONPress the cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath thechannel number. (The cursor is the little flashing line underneath oneof the parameters in the display.) Rotate the data entry control toselect MIDI channel 01-16. As the channel is changed, the display willchange to show the preset/hyperpreset, volume and pan associatedwith the displayed channel.

C01 VOL127 PAN=P000 Preset Name

PRESET/HYPERPRESET (PROGRAM) SELECTIONPress the cursor key repeatedly (or press Home/Enter) until the cursoris underneath the program number. A Program is a Preset or aHyperpreset. As the data entry control is rotated, the program numberand name will change. The displayed program will be assigned to thedisplayed MIDI channel. Programs are arranged into banks of 128, asshown in the diagram at left. Banks can be selected independently ofthe program number by pressing the Home/Enter button while turn-ing the data entry knob.

C01 VOL127 PAN=P000 Program Name

CHANNEL VOLUMEPress the cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath thevolume value. Rotate the data entry control to select volume 000-127.(This is the same parameter as MIDI volume control #7, and changesmade over MIDI will be shown in the display.)

CHANNEL PANPress the cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath the panvalue. Rotate the data entry control to select pan values -7 to +7 or“P”. When “P” is selected, the pan value specified in the preset isselected. Any other value will override the pan parameter in the pre-set. (This is the same parameter as MIDI pan control #10, and changesmade over MIDI will be shown in the display.)

↔ MIDI Channel Parameters↔ Preset/Hyperpreset Name

Page 25: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 2: Basic Operation 15

BASIC OPERATION

RAM Cards need to beinitialized before they arefirst used. They display willprompt you to initialize ablank card.

RAM Cards can be used tostore your own presets,hyperpresets and midimaps.

ROM Cards contain pre-recorded presets,hyperpresets and midimaps.You cannot save data to aROM card.

MEMORY CARDThe memory card is a convenient method of saving and transferringpresets and hyperpresets. Insert the card firmly into the slot on thefront panel with the label facing up. Press the eject button to releasethe card. A RAM card stores 128 presets, 128 hyperpresets and 16midimaps. RAM cards may be Write-Protected by moving the littleswitch on the end of the card. If a memory card is NOT inserted, thedisplay reads “ --noCard-- ” for banks 3 & 4 and the list of selectablemidimaps shrinks to 16.

MIDIMAP SELECTIONA Midimap is a set of parameters which can be used as a pre-sequencesetup, storing the program and other parameters for each MIDI chan-nel or it could be used as an “Effects Preset”, since each Midimapstores a complete effects setup. There are 16 Midimaps in Morpheusand an additional 16 Midimaps can be stored on a memory card.

To Select a MidimapPress the Midimap key, lighting the LED. The current screen willbe the one most recently selected since powering up Morpheus.The first screen in the menu is Midimap Select. Move the cursorto the lower line and use the data entry control to select one ofthe 16 Midimaps. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing. Press theHome/Enter key to load the new Midimap.

MIDIMAP SELECTM00 -defMIDIMap-

Simply scrolling through the list DOES NOT change the Midimap.You must move the cursor down to line two and press Enter. Tryout the different Midimaps and notice that the effects change witheach one.

••• The “current Midimap”is remembered on power-down, even though you maynot have saved it. Thiseffectively gives you a total o17 internal Midimaps.

Page 26: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual16

BASIC OPERATION

MULTI-TIMBRAL OPERATIONMulti-timbral operation means that the Morpheus can play morethan one sound at the same time. To access multiple presets ondifferent MIDI channels simultaneously, follow these instructions:

1. Set the MIDI mode to MULTI-Mode, using the MIDI modefunction in the Master menu (page 22).

2. Decide which MIDI channels you wish the Morpheus to re-ceive, and turn “All Messages” Off for the MIDI channels thatyou DO NOT want Morpheus to receive using the MIDI En-ables in the Midimap menu (page 33). Turning “All MessagesOff” turns that channel Off.

If you do not turn any channels Off, Morpheus willreceive all 16 MIDI channels simultaneously!

3. Select the desired preset or hyperpreset for each of the MIDIchannels you wish the Morpheus to receive using thePreset/Hyperpreset -> MIDI Channel selection screen in theMidimap menu (page 31).

4. Save the Midimap using the last screen in the Midimap menu.

5. Morpheus will now respond multi-timbrally on the MIDIchannels you have specified.

6. The effects can be programmed and each MIDI channel as-signed to an effects bus if so desired. The volume and panposition can be adjusted for each MIDI channel in theMidimap Volume and Pan screen. Remember to SAVE theMidimap or all of your work will be LOST when you selectanother Midimap.

PLAYING THE DEMO SEQUENCESMorpheus contains a play-only sequencer with 4 different sequencesto give you an idea of what is possible using this amazing instrument.Press and hold both the Midimap and Hyper buttons. The sequencewill start momentarily. Press the Enter button to stop the sequence.Press the right cursor button to advance to the next sequence.Sequences will cycle automatically.

DEMO 1 2 3 4ENTER=Stop >=Nxt

Page 27: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 3: Master Menu 17

MASTERMENU

Page 28: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual18

Page 29: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 3: Master Menu 19

MASTER MENU

The Master menu contains functions that affect the overall operationof Morpheus. For example, changing the Master Tune will change thetuning of all the presets, not just the one currently displayed.

To enable the Master menuPress the Master button, lighting the LED. The current screen willbe the one most recently selected since powering up Morpheus.The Cursor will appear underneath the first character of thescreen heading on line one.

To select a new screenPress the Home/Enter button or press the Cursorbuttonrepeatedly until the cursor is underneath the screen titleheading. Rotate the data entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameterPress the Cursor button repeatedly (or hold the right cursor keywhile turning the data entry control) until the cursor is under-neath the parameter value. Rotate the data entry control tochange the value.

To return to the main screenPress the Master button, turning off the LED.

MASTER MENU FUNCTIONS

• Master TuneMaster tune adjusts the overall tuning of all presets so that Morpheuscan be tuned to other instruments. The master tuning range is ± 1semitone in 1/64th semitone increments. A master tune setting of“+00” would indicate that the Morpheus is perfectly tuned to concertpitch (A=440 Hz).

MASTER TUNE+63

• TransposeThis function transposes the key of Morpheus in half-step intervals.The transpose range is ± 12 semitones or one octave.

TRANSPOSE+12 semitones

Page 30: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual20

MASTER MENU

• User Key TuningIn addition to standard twelve tone equal temperament, Morpheuscontains four additional preset tuning tables (Just C, Vallotti, 19 tone,and Gamelan) and one user definable tuning. User Key Tuning allowsyou to alter the parameters of the user definable tuning stored inmemory. The initial frequency of every key can be individually tuned,facilitating the creation of microtonal scales. Using the cursor key andthe data entry control, select the key name, the MIDI key number andthe fine tuning. The key name is variable from C-2 to G8. CoarseTuning (which also happens to be the MIDI key number) is variable from 0to 127. The fine tuning is variable from 00 to 63 in increments of 1/64of a semitone (approx. 1.56 cents). For each preset, the specific tuningtable is selected in the Preset menu.

USER KEY TUNINGKey:C1 036-00

• Global BendThis function sets the range of the pitch wheel controller (even whenpitch wheel is not routed to control pitch). The maximum pitch bendrange is ± 12 semitones. This function only affects presets which havetheir individual pitch bend range set to global.

GLOBAL BEND+/- 12 semitones

• Global Velocity CurveIncoming velocity data can be modified by a velocity curve in order toprovide different types of dynamics in response to your playing or tobetter adapt to a MIDI controller. This function allows you to selectone of eight global velocity curves or leave the velocity data unaltered(off). Global velocity curve only affects presets which have their indi-vidual velocity curve set to global.

GLOBAL VEL CURVE8

•• Application: The userey tuning can be used toune individual percussionnstruments.

It is possible to tune theitch up so high that theange of Morpheus' pitchhifter is exceeded. If theitch will not go any higher,ry using the Transposeontrol instead of Coarseuning.

•• In order for the PitchWheel to control pitch, itmust be routed to thisestination in the Realtime

Modulation Control screen.

Page 31: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 3: Master Menu 21

MASTER MENU

GLOBAL VELOCITY CURVES

Page 32: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual22

MASTER MENU

• MIDI ModeThis function selects one of the four MIDI receive modes and the MIDIsystem exclusive ID number.

Omni modeMorpheus responds to note information on all MIDI channelsand plays the preset currently displayed in the main screen.

Poly modeMorpheus only responds to note information received on thecurrently selected MIDI channel (the “basic channel”, displayedon the main screen) and plays that channel’s associated preset.

Multi modeMorpheus responds to data on any combination of MIDI chan-nels and plays the specific preset associated with each of the MIDIchannels.

Mono modeMorpheus responds to data on any combination of MIDI chan-nels but plays each channel monophonically. If a new note on achannel is played before the last note is released, the envelopeswill not be retriggered. Mono mode is particularly useful withalternate controllers such as MIDI guitars, etc.

Device IDThis function allows an external programming unit to distinguishbetween multiple Morpheus units. In the case of multipleMorpheus units, each unit should have a different device IDnumber.

MIDI MODE IDOmni 00

•MIDI Mode ChangeThis function selects whether or not MIDI mode change commandsare accepted or ignored when received over MIDI (see MIDI Mode).

MIDI MODE CHANGEDisabled

Warning: MIDI Sysex datawill not be transferredetween two Morpheus unitsnless the ID numbers ofoth units match.

Page 33: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 3: Master Menu 23

• MIDI Program Change MapIncoming MIDI program changes can be remapped to a differentnumbered preset. This is a handy feature when you want a specificMIDI program number sent from the master synth to be linked with aspecific preset or hyperpreset on Morpheus. For example, the ProgramChange Map could be set to call up preset 12 whenever Morpheusreceives program change number 26. Any preset or hyperpreset inMorpheus can be mapped to any incoming MIDI program changenumber. There are four separate Program Change Maps available. Thisfeature also allows you to call up presets in any bank, which are notaccessible through a standard MIDI program change. Note: TheProgram Map only operates if it is selected in the Midimapand if the Bank Select function in the Midimap is set tobank 0.

PROG CHG MAP #1026 > 012

MASTER MENU

••• The Bank Select functionis located in the Midimapmenu.

0

This chart shows how MIDI preset changes can be re-mapped. In this example,program changes 10-29 have been re-mapped. All other programs will be selectednormally.

••• On some synthesizerProgram 00 is called Program01 with a corresponding diference through all the numbers.

Page 34: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual24

MASTER MENU

• MIDI Controller AssignMorpheus allows you to assign up to four realtime control sourcesfrom your MIDI controller. These control sources could be modulationwheels, data sliders or whatever. In this screen, you set up whichcontrollers will be received by the Morpheus. What effect the control-ler will have is programmed separately for each preset. The MorpheusMIDI controllers are each assigned a letter, A-D. Each controller lettercan be assigned to a MIDI realtime controller from 00-31. Note: Ifcontroller numbers 7 or 10 are selected, they will override the stan-dard MIDI volume and pan control routings. For more information,see MIDI Realtime Controls in theProgramming Basics section.

CONTROLLER# ABCD01 02 03 04

• MIDI Footswitch ControlLike the MIDI Controllers, 3 MIDI footswitches can be assigned toMIDI footswitch numbers. Footswitches can be assigned numbers from64-79. Destinations for the footswitch controllers are programmed inthe Preset menu.

FOOTSW CTL# 12364 65 66

• Send MIDI DataThis function will send MIDI System Exclusive data to the MIDI Outport of Morpheus. The MIDI data can either be sent to a computer/sequencer or to another Morpheus. Using the cursor key and the dataentry control, select the type of MIDI data you wish to transmit.

SEND MIDI DATARAM Presets

Warning: When transfer-ng Sysex data from one

Morpheus to another, the IDumbers of both units must

match.

•• A few of the standard-zed MIDI Controllerumbers are listed below.

- Modulation Wheel orever

- Breath Controller

- Aftertouch: Rev 1 DX7

- Foot Pedal

- Portamento Time

- Data Entry

- Volume

- Balance

- Undefined

0 - Pan

1 - Expression

•• A few of the standard-zed MIDI switch numbersre listed below.

4 - Sustain Switch (on/off)

5 - Portamento (on/off)

6 - Sostenuto (on/off)

7 - Soft Pedal (on/off)

9 - Hold Pedal 2 (on/off)

Page 35: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 3: Master Menu 25

MASTER MENU

The Enter LED will be flashing. Press the Enter button to confirm theoperation. To receive MIDI data, simply send the MIDI data intoMorpheus from another Morpheus or your sequencer. The choices are:

RAM Presets ......................................... Transmits all the user RAM presets.

ROM Presets ................................... Transmits all the factory ROM presets.

Card Presets ...................................Transmits all the memory card presets.

RAM Hypers ............................... Transmits all the user RAM hyperpresets.

Card Hypers .......................... Transmits all the memory card hyperpresets.

RAM MIDI Maps ................................... Transmits all the user MIDI maps.

Card MIDI Maps ....................Transmits all the memory card MIDI maps.

Program Change Maps ............ Transmits all the program change maps.

Master Settings .................... Transmits all parameters in the Master menuexcept tuning table, program change map & viewing angle.

The “scratch” Midimap is also transmitted.

Tuning Table ..................................... Transmits only the user tuning table.

All RAM Data ................. Transmits all the user RAM data in the machine.

Individual Program ... Transmits only the specified preset or hyperpreset.

Individual Midimap ....................... Transmits only the specified midimap.

Individual Program Change Map Transmits the specified program map.

When Individual Programs, Midimaps or Program Change Maps arereceived via SysEx, they are placed in their proper locations.

• Sysex Packet DelayErrors can sometimes occur when transferring Sysex data fromMorpheus to a computer because the computer cannot process andstore the incoming data fast enough. This function allows you tochange the amount of delay between MIDI Sysex data packets so thatthe input buffer of your computer does not overflow. The defaultspeed is 300 delay units. A setting of “000” allows full speed MIDISysex. If you are having data transmission errors, increase the delayuntil the problem disappears.

SYSEX PKT DELAY300

To Record MIDI Data intoa Sequencer:

1. Setup sequencer to receivesystem exclusive data.

2. Place sequencer intorecord mode, then Send MIDIData.

To Receive MIDI Datafrom a Sequencer:

1. Simply play back thesequence into Morpheus.

Warning: Send datafrom your sequencer as youwould a regular sequence.Sending data in one hugechunk may clog theMorpheus input buffer.

A Midimap received byMorpheus does not changethe “scratch” Midimapunless it is currently selected.You must select the Midimafor it to be active. See page159.

••• The Individual Midimapsand Program Change Mapsare located after the Indi-vidual Programs (keepscrolling).

Turn “Keyboard Thru”mode OFF on your sequencerwhen transferring SysEx dataor a MIDI feedback loop mayresult.

Page 36: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual26

MASTER MENU

• Proteus SysexWhen this function is On, Proteus presets can be transferred overMIDI into Morpheus. It also allows the use of Proteus patch editingprograms. Instrument numbers and parameters which are unique toMorpheus will, of course, NOT be transferred. This function defaultsto Off to avoid unplanned conflicts with Proteus Sysex transfers.

PROTEUS SYSEXOff

• Auto SelectWhen editing a parameter which involves the keyboard, such as azone range, the parameter can be automatically selected simply byplaying the keyboard. This is a handy feature for “power program-mers”, but can sometimes be confusing. Therefore, Auto-Select can beturned On or Off. Auto-Select affects the following parameters: UserKey Tuning, Zone Select, Key Range, Midimap, Preset & HyperpresetNaming, Cross-switch Point, Keyboard Center.

AUTO-SELECTOff

• CompareThis function turns the Compare feature (accessed by pressing thePreset button when editing) On or Off. If Compare is turned On,changes made via MIDI SysEx will not be heard except when thePreset menu is enabled.

COMPAREOn

• Viewing AngleThis function allows you to change the viewing angle of the display sothat it may be easily read from either above or below. The angle isadjustable from +7 to -8. Positive values will make the display easier toread when viewed from above. Negative values make the display easierto read from below.

VIEWING ANGLE+7

If Morpheus does notespond to external presetditors, turn the Compareunction Off.

Page 37: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 4: Midimap Menu 27

MIDIMAPMENU

Page 38: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual28

Page 39: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 4: Midimap Menu 29

THE MIDIMAPA Midimap is a group of parameters which you might associate with aspecific sequence or song. You can also use the Midimaps as “EffectsPresets” for your favorite effects setups. The Midimap contains all thepre-sequence setup information, such as the program (preset orhyperpreset) for each MIDI channel, effects settings, etc. There are 16Midimaps in Morpheus and an additional 16 can be stored on amemory card.

MIDIMAP MENU

Midimaps are often used with Morpheus connected to an externalsequencer in MULTI mode. Multi mode allows Morpheus to receiveMIDI data on all 16 channels simultaneously. Morpheus can store 16different Midimaps. The two digital effects processors are also part ofthe Midimap.

••• Midimaps can also bechanged using a SysExParameter Change com-mand. See page 159.

Page 40: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual30

MIDIMAP MENU

To enable the Midimap menuPress the Midimap button, lighting the LED. The current screenwill be the one most recently selected since powering upMorpheus. The cursor will appear underneath the first characterof the screen heading on line one.

To select a MidimapPress the Home/Enter button or press the cursor key repeatedlyuntil the cursor is underneath the screen title heading. The firstscreen in the list is “Midimap Select”. Move the cursor to thelower line of the display and use the data entry control to selectthe desired Midimap. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing. PressHome/Enter to load the Midimap.

To select a new screenPress the Home/Enter button or press the cursor key repeatedlyuntil the cursor is underneath the screen title heading. Rotate thedata entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameterPress the cursor button repeatedly (or hold the cursor key whileturning the data entry control) until the cursor is underneath theparameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change thevalue.

To return to Program Select modePress the Midimap button, turning off the LED.

MIDIMAP MENU FUNCTIONS

• Midimap SelectThis is where you select one of the 16 Midimaps. You can use theMidimaps to setup a particular sequence or song. Position the cursorunder the Midimap number and use the data entry control to selectthe Midimap. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing. You MUSTpress Enter to load the Midimap.

MIDIMAP SELECTM00 Cool FX

Selecting a new Midimapwill overwrite the “current”r “scratch” Midimap.

Page 41: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 4: Midimap Menu 31

• Midimap NameThis function allows you to name each of the 16 Midimaps with aname of up to 12 characters. Position the cursor underneath thecharacter location and use the data entry control to change the char-acter. The keyboard can also be used to select characters.

This screen displays the current Midimap. The Midimap Select screenis the last screen in the menu.

MIDIMAP NAMEM15 New Song

• Preset/Hyper to MIDI Channel AssignThis function allows you to assign a preset or hyperpreset (program) toeach MIDI channel for the currently selected Midimap.

Position the cursor under the channel number and use the data entrycontrol to change the MIDI channel. Position the cursor under theprogram number and use the data entry control to change the pro-gram assigned to each MIDI channel.

PRESET/HYPER C01061 Space Wash

• Volume, Pan & Output MixThis function sets the Volume, Pan Position and Output Mix for eachMIDI channel in the selected Midimap. Volume allows you to adjustthe relative volume between programs. Pan allows you to positioneach program in the stereo field. The Volume control acts as an at-tenuator on the program volume. It cannot increase the volume pastthe setting programmed in the program.

The Pan control Overrides the pan value programmed in theprogram.

VOL PAN MIX C01127 =P FxA

MIDIMAP MENU

0

The Auto-Select feature inthe Master menu must beturned On in order to use thekeyboard for namingMidimaps.

The MIDI channel shownin the right side of the screenis NOT the MIDI basicchannel, only the one beingedited in the Midimap.

••• Channel Pan shouldnormally be set to “P” unlessrealtime control of panning idesired. If Pan is set to “0”, astereo preset will play inmono.

Page 42: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual32

MIDIMAP MENU

The Output Mix allows you to selectively route the program throughone of the effects processors or direct it to a pair of output jacks (foreach of the 16 MIDI channels). An additional selection called Preset or“P”, allows the selection to be made in the preset (Mix Output). Thuseffects and outputs can be selected according to MIDI channel or bypreset.

Position the cursor under the channel number and use the data entrycontrol to change the MIDI channel. Position the cursor under thevolume, pan or mix and use the data entry control to change thevalue. The volume and pan values are the same ones shown in themain screen.

The diagram below shows the function of Output Mix Select.

The Output Mix Select (for each MIDI channel) selects which bus in the OutputSection will be used.

•• Please note that the Sub Output is an “Effects Only”utput.

Page 43: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 4: Midimap Menu 33

MIDIMAP MENU

• MIDI EnablesThe MIDI enables allow you to enable or filter out specific MIDI mes-sages on a per-channel basis. MIDI messages that can be filtered in-clude:

All Messages (turns channel off)

Program Change

Bank Select

Volume Control (controller #7)

Pan Control (controller #10)

••• The Channel Pan controcan be disabled to preventincoming MIDI messagesfrom altering stereo effectsprogrammed in the presets.

BANK SELECT C010

Pitch Wheel

Mono Pressure

Key Pressure

Controllers A-D

Footswitches 1-3

The “All Messages” filter is useful when you have other MIDI devicesconnected and do not want Morpheus to respond to the MIDI chan-nels reserved for other devices. Messages will be passed when On andfiltered out when turned Off.

MIDI ENABLES C01AllMessages On

• Bank SelectThe MIDI specification only allows for 128 presets per MIDI channel.This function selects which bank of 128 presets will be used for incom-ing MIDI program change commands. Banks can be set for each MIDIchannel. This function allows you to access all presets andhyperpresets in Morpheus without using a MIDI Bank Select com-mand.

Page 44: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual34

MIDIMAP MENU

• Program Map SelectThere are four Program Maps in Morpheus. Program Maps allowincoming MIDI program changes to be translated into another num-ber. For example, a program map could be set up so that programnumber 12 is selected whenever program change number 26 is re-ceived at the MIDI in port. The Program Map Select function allowsyou to select one of the four Program Maps to be used in the currentlyselected Midimap or turn the Program Map function Off. Note: TheProgram Map only operates if it is turned On and the BankSelect function is set to bank 0.

PROG CHG MAPOff

This chart shows how MIDI preset changes can be re-mapped. In this exampleprogram changes 10-29 (darkened area) have been re-mapped. All other programswill be selected normally.

• FX AThis function allows you to select which effect is active on EffectProcessor A. Processor A effects include several types of reverb as wellas other effects such as delays, chorus, flanger, and phase shifter. Eacheffect has one or more adjustable parameters which are accessed bymoving the cursor to the lower line. See the Effects section for detailedinformation on these functions.

FXA: RoomDecay Time 100

•• The Program ChangeMaps are located in theMaster menu.

Page 45: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 4: Midimap Menu 35

MIDIMAP MENU

• FX BThis function allows you to select which effect is active on EffectProcessor B. Processor B effects include echo, delay, chorus, phaseshifter, distortion and ring modulator. Each effect has one or moreadjustable parameters which are accessed by moving the cursor to thelower line. See the Effects section for detailed information on thesefunctions.

FXB:StereoFlangeLFO Rate 050

• FX AmountThis function allows you to adjust the ratio of dry (unprocessed) towet (processed) signal coming out of the effect processor. A setting of100% indicates that all of the signal is being processed by the effect.The B->A parameter allows you to adjust the amount of effect B whichwill be fed through the A effect. If B->A is set to one value above100%, the word “Only” is displayed and the B amount changes to Off.This disconnects effect B from the main outputs and routes ALL ofeffect B through effect A.

FX AMOUNT A:50%B->A:0% B:75%

If the B->A amount is setto “Only”, no sound willresult if “No Effect” isselected for effect A

Page 46: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual36

• FX Output SelectThis function selects which pair of output jacks each effect processorwill be routed. This is shown in the diagram on page 32 by the 3-wayswitches after each effect processor.

FX OUTPUT SELECTA:Main B:Sub 1

• Save MidimapChanges made to a Midimap are not made permanent until theMidimap is Saved. To save a Midimap, move the cursor to the bottomline and select one of the 16 locations with the data entry control. TheEnter LED will be flashing. Pressing the Home/Enter switch will con-firm the operation. Writing to a Midimap location erases the existingMidimap in that location. Make sure that the location does not con-tain information you want to keep.

Save MIDIMAP toM00 -defMIDIMap-

MIDIMAP MENU

Page 47: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 37

EFFECTSSECTION

Page 48: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual38

Page 49: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 39

Where are the Effects?The effects in Morpheus are separate from the preset. This is similar toan external effects unit except that the signal path is kept in the digitaldomain to maintain excellent sound quality.

The effects section is located within the Midimap. There are 16Midimaps (and 16 more on a memory card) which store differenteffects setups. You could think of a Midimap as an Effects Preset(although they store other parameters as well).

EFFECTS BASICS

For each of the 16 MIDI channels, you may select: Effect A, Effect B,the Main Outputs (with no effect), the Sub 1 Output (with no effect),or you may choose to use the Mix Select programmed as part of thepreset. Therefore you can select effects routings by MIDI channel or bypreset. The choice is up to you.

The Effects section in Morpheus is located external to the preset in the Midimapmenu.

Page 50: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual40

EFFECTS OUTPUT ROUTINGThe diagram below shows how the effects section is integrated into theoutput jack routing scheme. The mix bus can be selected either by thepreset or by MIDI channel. When “Preset” is selected, the MIX SELECTprogrammed in the preset is used.

EFFECTS SECTION

MORPHEUS EFFECT BUS ARCHITECTUREThe two stereo effect processors on Morpheus are designated as A andB effects. “A” effects contain Reverb and other effects. The “B” effectsdo not include Reverbs, but include a host of other great effects whichare listed on page 53.

Each effect has its own set of control parameters which are appropriateto that particular effect. For both the A and B effects there is anamount parameter which determines the relative mix of the processedand unprocessed signals (wet/dry mix). The output of the B effect canalso be routed back through processor A. In addition, the stereosubmix outputs (Sub 1) can be used to externally process selectedpresets.

Page 51: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 41

EFFECTS SECTION

TO PROGRAM AN EFFECT:1) Press the MIDIMAP button lighting the LED.

2) Slowly turn the data entry knob clockwise until you find the screenshown below. Select one of the effect processors in the Mix Selec-tion. This selects the input to the effect processors.

VOL PAN MIX C01127 =P FXA

3) Set the FX Amount for the A or B effect. This adjusts the ratio ofeffected to un-effected signal. B->A allows you to route the outputof effect B through effect A (set the MIX to effect B).

FX AMOUNT A:50%B->A:0% B:50%

4) Select the desired Effect and program the appropriate parameters.

FXA:EchoL Delay Time 255

••• The diagram on theprevious page illustrates thefunction of Mix Select.

••• Setting the B->A percentage to maximum selects“Only” which disconnectseffect B from the mainoutputs and routes all of thesignal through effect A.

If the B->A amount is setto “Only”, no sound willresult if “No Effect” isselected for effect A

Page 52: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual42

EFFECTS SECTION

B EFFECTSFuzzFuzz LiteStereo FlangePhaserStereo ChorusDelayCross DelayRing Modulator

Floor, Wall &.Ceiling Reflections

Thousands ofVery ComplexReflections

A EFFECTSRoomWarm RoomSmall Rooms 1 & 2Halls 1, 2 & 3Chambers 1 & 2Plates 1 & 2Early Reflections 1-4Reverse Early Refl.Rain & ShimmerStereo FlangePhaserStereo ChorusDelayCross DelayEcho

REVERBReverberation is a simulation of a natural space such as a room or hall.The reverb effects in Morpheus simulate various halls, chambers,rooms and reverberation plates. In addition, there are several otherreverb effects such as Early Reflections and Rain. There is only oneadjustable parameter on the reverbs - Decay Time. Decay time is thelength of time that it takes for the reflected sound from the walls ofthe room to die away. In general, the larger the room, the longer thedecay time.

The diagram below breaks down the reverberated sound into its com-ponent parts. After an initial pre-delay period, the echoes from theclosest walls or ceiling are heard. These first echoes or the early reflec-tion cluster, vary greatly depending on the type of room. Roughly 20milliseconds after the reflection cluster, the actual reverberation beginsand decays according to the time set by the decay time parameter.

Page 53: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 43

EFFECTS SECTION

Room programs simulate small rooms with high frequency absorptioncaused by drapes and furniture.

Plates simulate plate type reverbs with their tight, dense early reflec-tions and sharp reverb build-up.

Chambers simulate medium sized rooms with hard reflective surfaces.

Hall programs recreate the open, spacious ambience of large concerthalls.

Early Reflection programs consist of the reflection cluster only with-out the reverb decay. These effects are similar to a multiple tap delayline and have a single adjustable parameter - Ambience.

The special reverbs Rain & Shimmer are variations of the early reflec-tion programs and consist of a dense group of short echoes followedby longer echoes.

FXA:Hall 1Decay Time: 165

Place the cursor underneath the reverb name and use the data entrycontrol to change the type of reverb. Moving the cursor to the lowerline allows you to change the decay time of the reverb. The decaytimes of the reverb programs range from 100-255. The ambiencecontrol of the Early Reflection programs range from 0-100.

• RoomA bright, medium sized room. The apparent source position is fairlyclose to the listener. Suitable for use with 100% wet mix setting foradding ambience.

• Warm RoomThis reverb is similar to “Room” with more high frequency absorption,slightly larger size and a more distant source position.

• Small Room 1This reverb is also to “Room” with shorter initial reflections, shorterdecay times and higher reflection density, due to the reduced roomsize. The apparent source position is closer to the listener.

• Small Room 2This reverb is a variation of “Small Room 1” with greater high fre-quency damping and a more distant source position.

Page 54: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual44

EFFECTS SECTION

• Hall 1Hall 1 is a large, highly reverberant space with auditorium-like acous-tics. Like all the Hall programs, “Hall 1” exhibits a warm, distantambience with slow reflection density buildup. With the decay param-eter set to maximum, “infinite” reverberation effects can be obtained.Adjustment of wet-dry mix can be used to position the listener fromthe “front row” (≈25%) to “back of the balcony” (≈100%).

• Hall 2This reverb is similar to “Hall 1”, but harder and brighter, with morepronounced slap echoes that come from parallel reflecting surfaces inthe room. Hall 2 also exhibits a pronounced reverb “bloom” or late-reflection buildup. A 50% wet mix creates the optimum “close” dis-tance adjustment.

• Hall 3Hall 3 is similar to “Hall 2”, but with larger scale stadium-like acous-tics. Hall 3 is warmer than Hall 2 (more high frequency damping) anddoes not display the obvious early reflections and slap echoes. It alsoexhibits a distinct predelay of approximately 100 milliseconds and apronounced late reflection buildup both of which contribute to theimpression of a large space. Wet mix values of 10% to 50% are mostappropriate, although a setting of 100% produces an effective cavesimulation.

• Chamber 1A simulation of a bright, medium-sized chamber reverb or recital hallwith hard walls. Early reflections are very prominent, with high reflec-tion density. Moderately long decays are possible at the maximumdecay setting.

• Chamber 2Similar to “Chamber 1” but with a much warmer sound. The wet mixadjustment provides an effective control over the apparent sourcelocation from close (10%) to very distant (100%).

• Plate 1Simulates a plate reverb unit. Gives a tight, bright, slightly metallicsound. Reflection buildup is very rapid, with high density. Early reflec-tions are minimized.

• Plate 2An effect similar to Plate 1, but slightly warmer with less density.

Page 55: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 45

EFFECTS SECTION

EARLY REFLECTION GROUPAll Early Reflection programs have a single Ambience parameter whichadds diffusion to the individual reflections. Lower ambience settingscause reflections to become more discrete, simulating harder reflectingsurfaces. The early reflection programs are simulations of increasinglylarge acoustic spaces, from a small studio (Early Refl 1) to a large roomlike a sound stage (Early Refl 4). The wet mix control acts effectively assource distance control. In general, lower mix amounts are moreeffective as the room size increases.

• Early Reflection 1

• Early Reflection 2

• Early Reflection 3

• Early Reflection 4

• Reverse Early ReflectionMore of a special effect than an acoustic simulation, Reverse ER con-tains a set of exponentially increasing delay taps, creating a kind of“zip” sound at low Ambience settings. At maximum ambience andlower wet mix values, the sound is more authentically acoustic, with along, delayed reflection “bloom”. The effect is similar to a large butwell damped parking garage.

SPECIAL REVERBSThese special reverbs all have a single Decay Time parameter.

• RainSimilar to a repeating delay, but with complex spatial and filteringeffects occurring across the stereo panorama. The effect on percussivesounds might be likened to a bucket of marbles raining down on agalvanized steel roof.

• ShimmerDistantly related to the Rain effect, Shimmer causes input signals to beprogressively diffused in time and space across the stereo panorama.The spatial diffusion is accompanied by a flanging effect. The programis highly responsive to left or right-panned inputs. A stunning specialeffect with percussive sounds, and especially through headphones.

Page 56: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual46

EFFECTS SECTION

• Stereo FlangerA flanger consists of a short audio delay line whose output is mixedtogether with the original signal. Mixing the delayed and originalsignals together results in multiple frequency cancellations creating acomb filter effect as shown in the diagram below. Since the flanger is atype of filter, it works best with harmonically rich sounds such asstrings.

The flanging effect was originally created using two tape recordersplaying identical recordings. By exactly synchronizing the two decksand then slowing the speed of one by grasping the tape reel flanges,the flanging effect was born.

The flanger in the Morpheus is a stereo device consisting of two sepa-rate delay lines controlled by a single set of controls. The block dia-gram of the flanger is shown below.

Page 57: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 47

EFFECTS SECTION

A Minimum Delay control serves to tune the flanger. In other words,it adjusts the placement of the comb filter notches. The initial delay isvariable from 26 microseconds to 6.5 milliseconds.

FXA:StereoFlangeMin Delay 100

A Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) varies this initial delay setting,changing the frequency of the notches and adding animation to thesound. The LFO Rate controls the rate of change and the LFO Depthcontrols how much the delay is changed by the LFO. The LFO adds tothe initial delay time so that with LFO Depth set to 255 the maximumdelay time is 13 milliseconds.

FXA:StereoFlangeLFO Rate 038

FXA:StereoFlangeLFO Depth 150

The Feedback control sends some of the delayed signal through thedelay line again. When positive feedback is used (values +1 to +127),the comb filter notches are deepened; when negative feedback is used(values -1 to-127) resonant peaks are formed between the notches which increasewith the amount of negative feedback.

FXA:StereoFlangeFeedback -127

Page 58: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual48

EFFECTS SECTION

• Stereo PhaserThe stereo phaser is an effect similar to the flanger although muchmore subtle. The phaser creates a swirly animation when used withharmonically rich sounds such as strings and voices. It can also beused like a chorus to thicken-up a thin sound.

FXA:PhaserLFO Rate 060

FXA:PhaserMin Freq 015

FXA:PhaserLFO Depth 100

FXA:PhaserFeedback 064

Page 59: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 49

EFFECTS SECTION

• Stereo ChorusThe function of a chorus device is to thicken the sound or to make onevoice sound like many. The way the effect is achieved is by mixing oneor more delayed versions of the signal in with the original. The delaytimes used are too short to be perceived as a an echo, but long enoughso that comb filtering does not occur. In addition, the delay time isvaried to simulate the random differences which occur when multipleinstruments are playing together. A slight amount of feedback im-proves the effect by creating multiple images of the sound as it recircu-lates again and again. The delay times are slightly different for eachchannel and the LFO phase is inverted on the right channel to helpcontribute to the overall chorus effect. The LFO Rate and Depth set-tings are critical to achieving a realistic effect with faster LFO Ratesgenerally requiring less LFO Amount and vice-versa.

The stereo chorus in the Morpheus is very similar to the stereo flangerexcept that the delay time is longer. The delay times for the stereochorus range from 13 milliseconds to 52 milliseconds, compared withthe 26 microsecond to 6.5 millisecond range of the flanger.

Chorus simulates the effect of multiple instruments playing by creating multiple copiesof the sound using a varying delay time and feedback.

Page 60: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual50

FXA:StereoChorusMin Delay 036

FXA:StereoChorusFeedback +100

EFFECTS SECTION

FXA:StereoChorusLFO Rate 050

FXA:StereoChorusLFO Depth 050

The Delay Time parameter is independently variable from 0 to 209milliseconds for both the left and right channels. The Tap Levelparameters control the amount of signal from the left and right delaysas well as how much signal from each is supplied to the feedbackcontrol. Feedback controls how many echoes are produced. A settingof 0 produces only one echo. The delay line is incredibly stable even

• DelayThe delay line is a stereo effect which can be used for doubling, echoesor fixed formant comb filtering with completely independent delaytime and tap levels for the left and right sides. The delay is shown inthe diagram below.

Page 61: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 51

FXA:DelayL DelayTime 120

FXA:DelayL Tap Level 120

with large amounts of feedback. This quality allows the delay line to beused as a resonator, where it acts as a kind of oscillator when excitedby an input signal. Infinite delay effects are also possible without therisk of runaway. The stereo delay can function as two independentdelay lines by panning the primary and secondary instruments to theextreme left and right.

FXA:DelayR DelayTime 060

FXA:DelayR Tap Level 120

EFFECTS SECTION

FXA:DelayFeedback 120

• Cross DelayCross Delay is identical to the normal delay line except that the outputpaths and the feedback paths cross over to the opposite channel inorder to produce a ping-pong type of effect when reproduced in stereo.Delay time is adjustable from 0 to 209 milliseconds. The Cross Delay isshown in the diagram below.

Page 62: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual52

• EchoThe Echo produces echoes up to 400 milliseconds in length (twice thatof the Delay and Cross Delay effects). The feedback path is indepen-dent of the output level and contains a low pass filter which simulatesan analog tape echo. The left and right signals are kept completelyindependent throughout the effect and have separate controls exceptthe feedback amount control which affects both channels.

EFFECTS SECTION

FXA:EchoL DelayTime 120

FXA:EchoL Tap Level 127

FXA:EchoR DelayTime 100

FXA:EchoR Tap Level 127

FXA:EchoFeedback 100

Page 63: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 53

B EFFECTSThe B effects include Stereo Flanger, Stereo Chorus, Phaser, Fuzz, RingModulator, Delay, Cross Delay and Fuzz Lite. Some of the B effectssuch as the Fuzz and the Ring Modulator are a bit bizarre (you won'twant to use them on every sound), but can be used to create sometruly amazing effects. The B effects can additionally be routed throughthe A effect as shown in the diagram below. Simple effects such as Fuzzcan take on a completely new character when routed through theReverb.

EFFECTS SECTION

• Stereo Delay BThe B Delay is identical to the delay line in the A effect group exceptthat the maximum delay time is 104 milliseconds (instead of 209milliseconds). This delay is useful for short echoes, slapback and dou-bling effects, as well as for fixed formant comb filtering. Like StereoDelay A, the feedback parameter is extremely stable even with highamounts, making it useful as a resonator for “infinite” delays.

• Stereo Cross Delay BThe B Cross Delay is identical to the cross delay line in the A effectgroup except that the maximum delay time is 104 milliseconds (in-stead of 209 mS). This delay is useful for short ping-pong echoes,stereo slapback and doubling effects.

Page 64: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual54

STEREO FUZZThe Stereo Fuzz introduces a controlled distortion to any signal pass-ing through it. Distortion creates harmonics by clipping the top of thewave when it exceeds a certain level. Sine waves are transformed intosquare waves and complex waves take on noise-like qualities. There aretwo types of fuzz in Morpheus: Fuzz and Fuzz Lite.

• FuzzThis Fuzz is probably the grungiest fuzz you have ever heard. Twofilters, one at the input and one at the output of the fuzz, allow you tocontrol the amount and type of harmonics added to the sound. TheInput Filter controls the amount of harmonics produced by the fuzzand the Output Filter removes harmonics at the output, smoothingthe sound. Higher values allow more harmonics to pass. The level ofthe input sound greatly affects the amount of fuzz, so that Morpheus'envelopes can now control harmonic content as well as the volume.Output Volume sets the output level of the fuzz. There are two com-plete fuzz effects, controlled by the same set of controls as shown inthe diagram below.

EFFECTS SECTION

Experiment with the way the input and output filters work on thesound. Fuzz is a specialized effect, not for every situation, but anotherpowerful tool in your arsenal.

Two independent sounds can be processed by panning primary andsecondary to opposite sides, or a single sound can be routed throughboth sides. If a single sound is panned slightly off center, the fuzz willact slightly differently on each side because of the difference in level.

• Fuzz LiteThis is a more restrained type of fuzz utilizing “soft-clipping”. As thelevel increases, the waveform through Fuzz Lite becomes somewhatsquared. As signal level is increased further, it transforms into a squarewave. There is no Output Volume control on Fuzz Lite.

Page 65: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 5: Effects Section 55

• Ring ModulatorA Ring Modulator is a device which takes two signals and multipliesthem together into one resultant signal containing only the sum anddifference frequencies of the two input waves. The original frequen-cies are not output! However, every harmonic of each signal multipliesevery other, according to its amplitude. As a result, ring modulatorstend to generate a lot of non-harmonic frequencies which can soundvery bell-like or out of tune.

This diagram shows the result of Ring Modulating two sine waves with frequencies of200 Hz and 800 Hz. Only the Sum and Difference frequencies of 1000 Hz and 600Hz will result.

EFFECTS SECTION

Page 66: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual56

There are no controls on the ring modulator as shown by the blockdiagram below. The left and right outputs are simply multiplied to-gether to form a monophonic output.

EFFECTS SECTION

By routing the preset (or MIDI channel) to effect B and panning toopposite sides (shown below), two different waves can be ring modu-lated. Ring modulation works well with simple waves such as sinewaves and the harmonic waveforms. Also, try complex waves modu-lated with sine waves. (Play chords!) Complex waveforms tend tosound rather noise-like.

Pan the primary and secondary instruments to left and right in thepan screen, then move to the Effect B screen and select Ring Modula-tor. There are no parameters to adjust in this effect so the lower line ofthe display reads: None.

FXB:RingModulateNone ---

Page 67: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 6: Hyperpreset Menu 57

HYPERPRESETMENU

Page 68: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual58

Page 69: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 6: Hyperpreset Menu 59

HYPERPRESET MENU

THE HYPERPRESETA Hyperpreset is a group of one to sixteen presets which have beenassigned to areas of the keyboard in order to have more than one soundavailable at once. Presets are assigned to ranges of the keyboard calledZones and may include 1 key or all 128 keys. Zones may be placedadjacent to each other (to create a split keyboard) or may overlap (tocreate fat, layered sounds). Each zone has its own volume, pan, trans-pose, tuning and velocity range.

••• An additional 128Hyperpresets can be storedon a memory card.

Compare Mode must beturned On in the MasterMenu for the Comparefeature to work.

In order to HEAR theHyperpreset as you edit it,you must have it assigned toa MIDI channel in the mainscreen.

To enable the Hyperpreset menuPress the Hyper button, lighting the LED. The current screen willbe the one most recently selected since powering up Morpheus.The Hyperpreset to be edited will be the LAST one selected oredited. The cursor will appear underneath the first character ofthe screen heading on line one.

To select a new screenPress the Home/Enter button or press a cursor button repeatedlyuntil the cursor is underneath the screen title heading. Rotate thedata entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameterPress the Cursor button repeatedly (or hold the right cursorbutton while turning the data entry control) until the cursor isunderneath the parameter value. Rotate the data entry control tochange the value.

To compare an edited Hyperpreset with the unedited originalPress the Hyper button, turning off the LED. The unedited Hyperis now active. Changing the Hyperpreset number will erase theedit. To hear the edited hyperpreset again, press the Hyper but-ton, lighting the LED.

To return to the main screenPress the Hyper button, turning off the LED.

Up to sixteen presets can be assigned to the keyboard in any desired arrangement

Page 70: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual60

• Preset to Zone AssignmentThis function allows you to select the preset which will be assigned toeach of the sixteen keyboard zones. Position the cursor under the zonenumber and use the data entry control to change the zone number.Position the cursor under the preset number and use the data entrycontrol to change the preset associated with each zone. Any preset canbe assigned to a zone. Set the preset number of unused zones to Off(located below preset 000).

PRESET Z01003 Multi/Split

HYPERPRESET MENU

HYPERPRESET MENU FUNCTIONS

• Hyperpreset NameHyperpreset Name allows you to name each of the 128 hyperpresetswith a name of up to 12 characters. Position the cursor under thecharacter location and use the data entry control to change the charac-ter. The keyboard can also be used to select characters. The chart belowshows the keyboard character assignments.

HYPERPRESET NAME000 Bass/Lead

If the Auto-Select functionn the Master Menu) isurned On, Zones will beelected as the keyboard islayed. In the case ofverlapping zones, the lowestone number will be selected.elocity will select the zone ifelocity switching has beenrogrammed.

2

0

Page 71: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 6: Hyperpreset Menu 61

• Zone Volume and PanThis function sets the Volume and Pan position for each zone. Volumeallows you to adjust the relative volume between presets and panallows you to change the position of each zone in the stereo field. TheVolume control acts as an attenuator on the preset volume. It cannotincrease the volume past the setting programmed in the preset. ThePan control adds algebraically to the pan value programmed in thepreset. Therefore if the preset pan setting is -7, (full left) a hyperpresetpan setting of +14 would move the sound to (+7) the extreme right sideof the stereo field.

Position the cursor under the zone number and use the data entrycontrol to change the zone number. Position the cursor under thevolume or pan number and use the data entry control to change thevalue for each zone.

VOLUME PAN Z01127 +00

• Zone Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range associated with each of the sixteenpossible zones. The key range of each zone can be set anywhere fromkey C-2 to G8.

By placing the key ranges next to each other on the keyboard, multipleinstruments can be accessed simultaneously. This is called “splitting”the keyboard because the keyboard is literally split up into differentsections each containing a different sound.

If multiple presets are placed on the same range of the keyboard, theywill all be played simultaneously. This is called “layering” since mul-tiple presets are layered on top of one another. This results in a verydense, “fat” sound.

KEY RANGE Z01C-2 -> G8

HYPERPRESET MENU

Page 72: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual62

• Zone Velocity RangeEach zone can be given its own velocity range so that different presetswill be selected according to the keyboard velocity. Imagine two pre-sets assigned to the same keyboard range. If one preset were assignedthe velocity range 000 to 64, and the other to velocity range 65 to 127,key velocities below 65 would select the first preset and key velocities65 and above would select the second preset. Because there are sixteenpossible zones, presets can be layered 16 deep!

VEL RANGE Z01low:000 hi:127

Zone Velocity Range allows you to select different preset layers according to keyvelocity.

HYPERPRESET MENU

Page 73: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 6: Hyperpreset Menu 63

• Zone Velocity OffsetThis function works in conjunction with the Zone Velocity Rangefeature and adds a programmable offset value to the velocity valueapplied to the preset. The velocity offset is variable for each zone from -126 to +126.

Suppose that a preset is assigned a velocity range of 000-026 (see previ-ous screen). If the preset was programmed with velocity to volume ortone, the low velocity range will make the preset soft and muted. Byoffsetting the velocity value to the preset by +100, the preset willreceive velocity values of 100-126 instead of 000-026 and the presetwill sound normal again.

VEL OFFSET Z01+000

• Zone TransposeThe key of each zone can be transposed in half-step intervals. Therange of the transpose function is ±36 semitones (three octaves up ordown). Transpose shifts the relative position of the keyboard in rela-tion to middle C rather than actually changing the tuning of the zone.

TRANSPOSE Z01+36

• Zone Pitch TuneThe tuning of each zone can be adjusted in coarse and fine increments.The coarse tuning adjustment tunes the zone in semitone increments.This is different from the transpose function in that the sounds areactually retuned, rather than having the relative key position changed.This control can produce radical timbre shifts in the sampled sounds.The range of the coarse tuning control is ±36 semitones (±3 octaves).The fine tuning control changes the pitch in 1/64 semitone increments(approx. 1.56 cents). The fine tuning range is ±1 semitone.

PITCH TUNE Z01crse+36 fine+64

HYPERPRESET MENU

If the Auto-Select function(in the Master Menu) isturned On, Zones will beselected as the keyboard isplayed.

Page 74: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual64

HYPERPRESET MENU

•• The function generatorhapes are diagrammed onage 214 of this manual.

• Hyperpreset Portamento ModeThis function sets the number of notes that will be affected by porta-mento for all presets in a hyperpreset which have portamento turnedOn. It works exactly the same as preset portamento mode, but controlsthe mode for the hyperpreset.

If the Portamento Mode is set to two keys and a three-note chord isplayed, only two of the notes will glide. Notes will glide from theprevious note or notes played. By setting the number of keys to matchthe number of notes in your chords, smooth glides between thosechords can be accomplished without having notes glide in from ran-dom starting points. The number of keys can be set from mono to five-note polyphonic.

PORTAMENTO MODEPoly 2 keys

Free-Run Function GeneratorThe function generator is another kind of modulation source which ismuch more programmable than an envelope generator or an LFO(although it can function as either). The function generator can beused when you want the type of complex control that a normal AHDSRenvelope cannot provide. See the Function Generator description inthe Preset Programming section for complete details.

FREE-RUN FG S1Level +127

Function Generators contain up to eight segments, each with a level, time, shape,and conditional jump parameter. The Free-Run FG is a kind of “Master” controllerwhich can control all presets contained in a hyperpreset.

Page 75: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 6: Hyperpreset Menu 65

HYPERPRESET MENU

Hyperpresets contain a slightly different version of the function genera-tor called a Free-Running Function Generator or Free-Run FG. There isone Free-Run FG per hyperpreset (effectively one per MIDI channel).What the Free-Run FG actually controls is programmed in the presetitself.

The Free-Run FG differs from the other FGs in two fundamental ways.There is one Free-Run FG per Hyperpreset which can modulate anypresets in the hyper which have the Free-Run FG assigned. This differsfrom the 2 function generators in the preset which are completelyindependent from note to note. Because the Free-Run FG is like a globalmodulation source, it can be used when you want to modulate multiplesounds in the same way. The Free-Run FG is only active whenplaying a Hyperpreset.

For example, you could program the Free-Run FG to be an LFO andmodulate the pitch. All the voices in all presets in that hyperpresetwith Free-Run FG assigned would modulate up and down inunison.The Free-Run FG begins the instant the hyperpreset is selectedand continues to run until stopped by its programming or when an-other hyperpreset is selected. If the Free-Run FG is not pro-grammed to loop, it simply runs to the last segment andstops! Because it continually runs (if so programmed) and is notstarted at the beginning of a note like the preset function generators, itis called “free-running”.

The Free-Run Function Generator only works in a Hyperpreset, even though themodulation routing is made in the preset.

••• See the ProgrammingBasics section of this manualfor additional information onthe Function Generators.

Page 76: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual66

HYPERPRESET MENU

The functions of the Free-Run FG are almost identical to the preset FG'sexcept that the conditional jumps are more limited. The conditionaljumps are listed below.

Never ............................. Never jumps. Always goes on to next segment.

Always End .................. Always jumps at the end of the current segment.

Note On End ................. Jumps at the end of the segment if the note is stillon.

Note On Imm. .............. Jumps immediately if the note is still on.

Note Off End ................ Jumps at the end of the segment if the note is off.

Note Off Imm. ............. Jumps immediately if the note is off.

Footsw. 1-3 End ........... Jumps at the end of the segment if the selectedFootswitch is pressed.

Footsw. 1-3 Imm. ........ Jumps immediately if the selected Footswitch ispressed.

• Save HyperpresetChanges made to a hyperpreset are NOT made permanent until thehyperpreset is Saved. To save a hyperpreset, move the cursor to thebottom line and select the location for the new hyperpreset with thedata entry control. The Enter LED will be flashing. Pressing the Enterswitch will confirm the operation. Any of the hyperpreset locationsmay be selected. Saving to a hyper erases the existing hyper in thatlocation. Make sure that the destination does not contain informationyou want to keep.

SAVE HYPER to...000 SynBass/Lead

2

Page 77: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 83

PRESET PROGRAMMING

Page 78: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual84

PRESET PROGRAMMING

The Tone filter is a simple low-pass tone control which can be used todarken the tone of an instrument. The Z-Plane filter is an ultra-powerful synthesizer filter which can dramatically alter the sound ofan instrument.

To understand how a filter works we need to understand what makesup a sound wave. A sine wave is the simplest form of sound wave. Anywaveform except a sine wave can be analyzed as a mix of sine waves atspecific frequencies and amplitudes.

One way to represent complex waveforms is to use a chart with fre-quency on one axis and amplitude on the other. Each vertical line ofthe chart represents one sine wave at a specific amplitude andfrequency.

20

40

60

80

100

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Frequency

...

Am

pli

tud

e

Any waveform can be analyzed as a mixture of sine waves.

FILTER MODULATIONThe block diagram of a single channel is shown below.

R

L

PanInstrument Tone DCAMorphFilter

Page 79: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 85

PRESET PROGRAMMING

A filter that lets only the high frequencies pass is called a High PassFilter.

A filter which only lets a certain band of frequencies pass is called aBandpass Filter.

WHAT IS A FILTER?Most of the instruments in Morpheus are complex waves containingmany sine waves of various amplitudes and frequencies. A filter is adevice which allows us to remove certain components of a sounddepending on its frequency. For example, a Low Pass Filter lets thelow frequencies pass and removes only the high frequencies.

20

40

60

80

100

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Frequency...

Am

pli

tud

e

Output of Filter

Low PassFilter

Cutoff Frequency

20

40

60

80

100

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Frequency...

Am

pli

tud

e Filter Output

Initial Frequency

High PassFilter

20

40

60

80

100

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Frequency...

Am

pli

tud

e

Center Frequency

FilterOutput

Band PassFilter

Page 80: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual86

PRESET PROGRAMMING

A Notch Filter is just the opposite of a bandpass filter and is used toeliminate a narrow band of frequencies.

Another control found on traditional filters is called Q or resonance. Alowpass filter with a high Q would emphasize the frequencies aroundthe cutoff frequency. The chart below shows how different amounts ofQ affect the low pass filter response. In terms of sound, frequenciesaround the cutoff will tend to “ring” with high Q settings. If the filteris slowly swept back and forth, with a high Q, various overtones willbe “picked out” of the sound and amplified as the resonant peaksweeps over them. Bells and gongs are real world examples of soundswhich have a high Q.

Another parameter on a filter is the number of poles it contains.Traditional synthesizer filters were usually either 2-pole or 4-polefilters. The number of poles in a filter describes the steepness of itsslope. The more poles, the steeper the filter's slope and the strongerthe filtering action. The tone controls on your home stereo are prob-ably one-pole or two-pole filters. Parametric equalizers are usuallyeither two-pole or three-pole filters. In terms of vintage synthesizers,Moog and ARP synthesizer filters used 4-pole filters, Oberheim synthe-sizers were famous for their 2-pole filter sound.

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

4-poleLowpass

2-poleLowpass

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e Low Q Med Q High Q

Page 81: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 87

PRESET PROGRAMMING

Using a filter, we now have a way to control the harmonic content ofa sampled sound. As it turns out, even a simple low pass filter cansimulate the response of many natural sounds.

For example, when a piano string is struck by its hammer, there areinitially a lot of high frequencies present. If the same note is playedsofter, there will be fewer of the high frequencies generated by thestring. We can simulate this effect by routing the velocity of thekeyboard to control the amount of high frequencies that the low passfilter lets through. The result is expressive, natural control over thesound.

If an envelope generator is used to control the cutoff frequency of alow pass filter, the frequency content can be varied dynamically overthe course of the note. This can add animation to the sound as well assimulate the response of many natural instruments.

PARAMETRIC FILTERSA more complex type of filter is called a parametric filter. A parametricfilter gives you control over three basic parameters of the filter. Thethree parameters are: Frequency, Bandwidth, and Boost/Cut. The Fre-quency parameter allows you to select a range of frequencies to beboosted or cut, the Bandwidth parameter allows you to select thewidth of the range, and the Boost/Cut parameter either boosts or cutsthe frequencies within the selected band by a specified amount. Fre-quencies not included in the selected band are left unaltered. This isdifferent from a band pass filter which attenuates (reduces) frequenciesoutside the selected band.

Boost

Cut

Freq.

0 dB

+18 dB

-18 dB

Bandwidth

Frequency

Am

plit

ud

e

ParametricFilter

The parametric filter is quite flexible. Any range of frequencies can beeither amplified or attenuated. Often times, several parametric sec-tions are cascaded (placed one after another) in order to create com-plex filter response curves.

Page 82: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual88

PRESET PROGRAMMING

If four parametric filter sections were cascaded, it would be possible tocreate the following complex filter response.

Many natural instruments have complex resonances which are basedon their soundboard or tube size. The resonance shown above wouldbe impossible to create using a normal synthesizer filter.

THE MORPHEUS FILTERThe Morpheus filter is actually much more complex than the fourparametric sections described above. As an example of its power, thediagram below shows one of the possible ways that the Morpheusfilter can be configured. This amount of filtering is unprecedented inall of electronic music history. (Especially when you consider that weare only talking about one of the 32 channels.)

10

Linear Frequency - Hertz

dB

Mag

nit

ud

e

-5

0

5

15

20

500 10,000 15,000 20,000

4 Parametric Equalizers

Right away you can see that we now have 20 different parameters tocontrol. Ah, there's the catch. How can all these parameters be effec-tively controlled? 20 envelope generators? We don't think so.

In Out

6 Parametric Equalizer Sections1 Low PassSection

Fc Q FcBw

Gain

FcBw

Gain

FcBw

Gain

FcBw

Gain

FcBw

Gain

FcBw

Gain

Page 83: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 89

PRESET PROGRAMMING

Consider, as an example, the human vocal tract, which is a type ofcomplex filter or resonator. There are dozens of different musclescontrolling the shape of the vocal tract. When speaking, however, wedon't think of the muscles, we just remember how it feels to form thevowels. A vowel is really a configuration of many muscles, but weconsider it a single object. In changing from one vowel to another, wedon't need to consider the frequencies of the resonant peaks! Youremember the shape of your mouth for each sound and interpolatebetween them.

THE Z-PLANE FILTERIn a simple Morpheus filter, we would start with two complex filtersand interpolate between them using a single parameter. Refer to thediagram below.

The Morpheus Z-plane filter has the unique abilty to change its function over time.

Filters A and B represent two different complex filters. By changing asingle parameter, the Morph, many complex filter parameters cannow be changed simultaneously. Following along the Morph axis youcan see that the filter response smoothly interpolates between the twofilters. This is the essence of the Z-plane filter. Through the use ofinterpolation, many complex parameters are condensed down intoone manageable entity.

This Z-Plane filter sweep can be controlled by an envelope or functiongenerator, an LFO, modulation wheels or pedals, keyboard velocity,key pressure, etc. In fact, any of the modulation sources can controlthe Z-Plane filter.

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

Morph

A Filter

B Filter

Morph

Page 84: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual90

PRESET PROGRAMMING

Because creating the complex filtering is difficult and very time con-suming, we have created hundreds of filters and installed them perma-nently in ROM for your use. You simply select and use the filters in amanner similar to choosing an instrument. Because there are so manytypes of filters to choose from, the number of possible permutations isstaggering. For example, you could play a guitar sound through avocal tract filter and create a talking guitar sound. Or you could havean acoustic guitar whose body shape changes as you play.

In the current example, two complex filters were created and theMorph parameter was used to interpolate between them. This is thesimplest way to visualize a Morpheus filter

Morph

The next logical extension of this two filter model would be to add yetanother filter pair. The diagram below shows an example using fourfilters. Now we have two parameters that can be controlled.

The diagram above, adds a Frequency Tracking parameter which variesthe frequency of the filter. If we had set the frequency tracking andmorph parameters as shown in the diagram above, the dot wouldrepresent the resulting filter position: a mixture of all four, but closestin nature to the left rear filter.

In the Morpheus filter there is only one parameter that can be continu-ously varied in realtime and that is the Morph parameter. Other filterparameters, such as Frequency Tracking, can only be changed at note-on time.

Frequency Tracking

Morph(Envelope,Wheel,LFO, etc.)

(Set at Note-On Time)

••• See the Step-By-Stepchapter for more informationon the Z-plane filters.

Page 85: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 91

PRESET PROGRAMMING

Suppose we added yet another dimension to the filter model. Wecould have the realtime Morph parameter, the Frequency Trackingparameter (set at note-on time) and one more parameter, perhapscontrolling the amount of the filter peaks with key velocity. A way tovisualize a three-dimensional filter model is shown by the diagrambelow.

••• Note: The FrequencyTracking parameter isTransform 1.

••• If the frequency graphsat the corners of the cube areconfusing you, think of themas the settings on a graphicequalizer.

Each axis of the three-dimensional cube changes the filter in a differ-ent way. In the example above, key number is being applied to theFrequency Tracking parameter in order to make the filter frequencytrack or follow the notes played on the keyboard. Assigning the Key-board to frequency is called Key Tracking and is used to keep the tim-bre of the sound constant as you play up and down the keyboard.Without key tracking the sound would get duller as you move up thekeyboard and could sound completely different at opposite ends of thekeyboard. Because Frequency Tracking is so important it has beenassigned its own parameter which is used in many of the filters (thereare exceptions).

In the filter model above, there is another note-on (defined at the timethe note is pressed) parameter, Transform 2. Unlike the FrequencyTracking parameter, the effect of Transform 2 may vary from filter tofilter. In the example above, Transform 2 is being used to vary the sizeof the peaks and notches in the filter. The frequency plots in theupper plane of the cube have sharper peaks. Key velocity could beused to control Transform 2 and the sharpness of the filter peaks.

The Cube filters are actually constructed of eight different complex filters.

Key Number

Frequency Tracking

Tran

sfor

m 2

Vel

oci

ty

Mor

ph

Mor

ph

Tran

sfor

m 2

Tran

sfor

m 2

Mor

ph

Tran

sfor

m 2

Real-T

ime

Mor

ph

Frequency Tracking

Frequency Tracking

Frequency Tracking

Page 86: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual92

PRESET PROGRAMMING

• Another ViewAnother way to look at the Z-Plane filter is simply as a “black box”.You don't really need to think about all the possible filter permuta-tions in order to use it. You just need to know what the controls doand listen to the sound. Each Z-Plane filter is described in the Refer-ence Section of this manual.

FilterLevel

MorphOffset

Freq.Track

Transform2

Reverse

Filter Type

The Morph and Transform 2 parameters vary in function from filter tofilter. About half of the Z-Plane filters are not Cubes andtherefore DO NOT use Transform 2. The Frequency Trackingparameter usually controls the frequency of the filters, moving peaks,shelves or notches up and down in frequency. Refer to the ReferenceSection of this manual for specific information on each filter.

Many of the filter types in Morpheus are models of traditional acousticinstruments such as electric piano or guitar. When an electric pianosample is played through an electric piano filter, the harmonics of thesample can now be controlled using the filter parameters.

Of course, you can put any instrument through the filter and the filterwill shape the basic character of the instrument. This “building-block”approach to synthesis is only a part of what makes Morpheus such aunique and powerful synthesizer.

Lowpass Filter Morphing into a Bandpass Filter

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

The Z-Plane filter can change its function in time.

Imagine a Lowpass filter transforming into a Bandpass filter. TheMorph parameter (Morph Offset) typically handles this type offunction.

••• On some filters, theFrequency Tracking param-eter DOES NOT control thefilter frequency. See the filterdescriptions in the ReferenceSection for details.

Page 87: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 93

PRESET PROGRAMMING

MORPHEUS SIGNAL FLOWGoing back to the block diagram for a single channel we can re-exam-ine the complete signal path.

InstrumentThis is the sampled sound wave. The pitch of the instrument canbe modulated by any modulation source. The sample start pointcan only be modulated by a velocity or key source (see the nextpage).

ToneTone is a simple low-pass tone control which can be used todarken the sound. Tone can only be set at Note-On time (see thenext page). Key velocity is commonly used to modulate the tone(in a negative way) so that the harder you play, the brighter thesound becomes.

Z-Plane FilterThe Z-Plane Filter controls the harmonic content of an instru-ment in a highly controlled manner. Any modulation source canbe used to control the various aspects of this complex filter.

DCADigitally Controlled Amplifier. Together with the AlternateVolume AHDSR, the DCA is used to shape the volume contour ofa sound. The DCA can be controlled by any modulation source.Key Velocity is often used as a modulation source for the DCA sothat the harder you play, the louder the sound becomes.

PanAdjusts the balance of sound between the left and right channels.

R

LVolume

Pan

VolumeAHDSR

Instrument

PitchSampleStart

ToneZ-Plane Filter

DCA

Aux.DAHDSR

Velocity

KeyPosition

MorphFreqTrk

FunctionGen. Possible

ModulationSources

Trans2

The vertical arrows represent possible modulation routings to the basic signal path.

Page 88: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual94

PRESET PROGRAMMING

NOTE-ON CTRL #0Vel Attack +064

NOTE-ON MODULATION CONTROLModulation sources must be connected to a destination in order tohave any effect. The diagram and the LCD screen above show howmodulation sources are connected to destinations. The modulationsources can control any of the destinations indicated by the smallarrows.

Note-On modulation sources are only measured once at Note-Ontime, hence the name. Even a controller like the Pitch Wheel is onlymeasured once (at note-on time) when routed as a Note-On control.The Realtime Modulation screen (on the next page), allows continu-ous variation.

The possible modulation routings are completely flexible as shown inthe diagram above. Multiple sources can control the same destination,or a single source can control multiple destinations.

Source

Patch Number

ModulationAmount

Destination

Note-OnModulation SourcesKey Number, Key VelocityInitial Pitch Wheel AmountInitial Controller A AmountInitial Controller B AmountInitial Controller C AmountInitial Controller D AmountInitial Mono Pressure AmountInitial FR Func. Gen. Amount

DestinationsOffPitch, Primary PitchSecondary PitchVolume, Primary VolumeSecondary VolumeAttack, Primary AttackSecondary AttackDecay, Primary DecaySecondary DecayRelease, Primary ReleaseSecondary ReleaseCrossfadeLFO 1 Amount, LFO 1 RateLFO 2 Amount, LFO 2 RateAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleaseFunction Gen 1 AmountFunction Gen 2 AmountPortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter MorphSecondary Filter MorphPan, Primary PanSecondary PanSample StartPrimary Sample StartSecondary Sample StartTone, Primary ToneSecondary ToneFilter Level, Primary Filter LevelSecondary Filter LevelFilter Frequency TrackPrimary Filter Frequency TrackSecondary Filter Freq. TrackFilter Transform 2Primary Filter Transform 2Secondary Filter Transform 2

LFO 1

Amount Rate

LFO 2

Amount Rate

R

LVolume

PanPrimary

InstrumentPitch

SampleStart

Tone

VELOCITY

VELOCITYCURVE

KEY NUMBER

KEYBOARDCENTER

Note-On Modulation Sources

X-Fade

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

R

LVolume

PanSecondaryInstrument

PitchSampleStart

Tone

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

PortamentoRate

DCA

DCA

Modulation Destinations

AuxiliaryDAHDSR

AmtAtk Dec Rel

CONTROLLERA-B-C-D

(INITIAL SETTING)

PRESSURE(INITIAL SETTING)

FR FUNCTIONGENERATOR(INITIAL SETTING)

PITCH WHEEL(INITIAL SETTING)

FunctionGenerator 1

AmountCond

FunctionGenerator 2

AmountCond

Z-PlaneFilter

T2TrkMorphAttn.

Z-PlaneFilter

T2TrkMorphAttn.

Page 89: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 95

PRESET PROGRAMMING

RealtimeModulation SourcesPitch WheelMIDI Control AMIDI Control BMIDI Control CMIDI Control DMono PressurePolyphonic PressureLFO 1, LFO 2Auxiliary EnvelopeFunction Generator 1Function Generator 2Free-Run Function Generator

DestinationsOffPitch, Primary PitchSecondary PitchVolume, Primary VolumeSecondary VolumeAttack, Primary AttackSecondary AttackDecay, Primary DecaySecondary DecayRelease, Primary ReleaseSecondary ReleaseCrossfadeLFO 1 Amount, LFO 1 RateLFO 2 Amount, LFO 2 RateAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleaseFunction Gen 1 AmountFunction Gen 2 AmountPortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter MorphSecondary Filter MorphPan, Primary PanSecondary Pan

REALTIME CTRL #9PWhl Pitch +064

REALTIME MODULATION CONTROLRealtime modulation sources are parameters which can be continu-ously varied over time. The velocity and keyboard modulations, incomparison, are set at the key depression. Modulation sources must beconnected to a destination in order to have any effect.

The diagram and the LCD screen above show how modulation sourcesare connected to destinations. The modulation sources can controlany of the destinations indicated by the small arrows. The possiblemodulation routings are completely flexible as shown in the diagramabove. Multiple sources can control the same destination, or a singlesource can control multiple destinations.

When Modulating Enve-lope Attack, Decay orRelease Times:

Positive amounts of modula-tion increase the time.

Negative amounts of modu-lation decrease the time.

Source

Patch Number

ModulationAmount

Destination

Realtime Modulation Sources

POLYPRESSURE

MONOPRESSURE

MIDICONTROLLER

A/B/C/DLFO 2

AUXILIARYENVELOPELFO 1PITCH WHEEL

AuxiliaryDAHDSR

AmtAtk Dec Rel

LFO 1

Amount Rate

LFO 2

Amount Rate

Modulation DestinationsR

LVolume

Pan

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

PrimaryInstrument

Pitch

ToneZ-Plane

Filter

X-Fade

R

LVolume

Pan

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

SecondaryInstrument

Pitch

ToneZ-Plane

Filter

Morph

Morph

PortamentoRate

DCA

DCA

FUNCTIONGENERATOR

FREE-RUNFUNCTION

GENERATOR

FunctionGenerator 1

Amt

FunctionGenerator 2

Amt

Page 90: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual96

PRESET PROGRAMMING

KEY NUMBERThe Key Number is affected by the Keyboard Center parameter whichcan be set to any key from A-1 to C7. The keyboard center establishesa reference point for keyboard modulation; keys above this point willhave a positive value, while keys below it will be negative. For ex-ample, if we wished to change the volume of an instrument using keynumber and the key center were set to key A1, the instrument wouldget progressively louder above A1 and progressively softer below A1.

KEY CENTER

+

-

0

-

+

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 4

Curve 2

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 3

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 1

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

VELOCITY CURVESIncoming velocity values can be scaled by one of the four velocitycurves or by one of the eight Global velocity curves in order to matchyour playing style or better adapt to the MIDI controller. Experimentwith the curves to find the one that works best for your style andMIDI controller.

Page 91: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 7: Preset Programming 97

PRESET PROGRAMMING

MIDI REALTIME CONTROLSThe MIDI realtime controllers may seem confusing at first, but theyare really very simple to understand. You probably already know thatthere are 16 MIDI channels that can be used. Each of the 16 MIDIchannels uses basically 3 types of messages; note on/off, programchanges, and continuous controller messages. Your MIDI keyboard, inaddition to telling Morpheus which note was played, may also sendrealtime control information, which simply means occurring in realtime or live. (You may be using a MIDI device other than a keyboard,but for simplicity's sake we'll presume that you're using a keyboard.)Realtime control sources include such things as pitch wheels or levers,modulation wheels or levers, control pedals, aftertouch, etc. and areused to add more expression or control. Your MIDI keyboard sends outrealtime controller information as continuous controllers. There is a setof 32 continuous controllers for each of the 16 MIDI channels. Someof the controllers, such as pitch wheel, volume, and pan have stan-dardized numbers. For example, volume is usually sent on continuouscontroller #7.

NoteOn/Off

ContinuousControllers

MIDIChannel 16

ProgramChange

NoteOn/Off

ContinuousControllers

MIDIChannel 3

ProgramChange

NoteOn/Off

ContinuousControllers

MIDIChannel 2

ProgramChange

NoteOn/Off

ContinuousControllers

MIDIChannel 1

ProgramChange

••• MIDI wind controllersmay work better if you assignone of the MIDI A, B, C, Dcontrollers to control volume.This will allow the MIDIvolume to be added to thecurrent volume.

Common realtime controllers such as the pitch wheel, volume, panand pressure are pre-programmed to their proper destinations. Yourkeyboard may have other realtime controls such as a control pedal ordata slider which can also be programmed to control most of theparameters on Morpheus.

Morpheus is equipped with the sophisticated MidiPatch™ system,which allows you to route any continuous controller to any realtimemodulation destination. The MidiPatch system is also very easy to use.First, you must know which controller numbers your keyboard cantransmit.

Let's say for example, that you are using a Yamaha DX7 as your masterkeyboard. The DX has pitch and mod. wheels, a breath controller, adata slider and a foot pedal, all of which transmit their values overMIDI. The standard MIDI controller numbers for the controls are listedbelow (the pitch wheel has a dedicated controller, PWH).

Page 92: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual98

PRESET PROGRAMMING

First, we would go to the Master menu, MIDI Controller Assign anddefine the 4 MIDI controllers that we wish to use. Assign each control-ler number to one of the lettersA-B-C-D.

01 - Modulation Wheel A

02 - Breath Controller B

04 - Foot Pedal C

06 - Data Entry D

To complete the connections for a particular preset, go to the Editmenu, Realtime Modulation Control, and route the MIDI A, B, C, D tothe desired destinations. These could be patched to any four destina-tions or even to the same destination. The MIDI Controller Amountmenu, (in the Preset menu) allows you to scale the amounts of each ofthe controllers by a positive or negative value. The signal flow isshown in the diagram below.

The MIDI controllers A-B-C-D must have both a source (0-31), and a controldestination assigned.

0123

31

MIDI

ControllerC

Control Destinations

+-

MasterMenu

EditMenu

A

B

C

D

0123

31

MIDI

ControllerA

0123

31

MIDI

ControllerB

0123

31

MIDI

ControllerD

MIDI

Amount

+-

+-

+-

PitchPrimary Pitch onlySecondary Pitch onlyVolumePrimary Volume onlySecondary Volume onlyAttackPrimary Attack onlySecondary Attack onlyDecayPrimary Decay onlySecondary Decay onlyReleasePrimary Release onlySecondary Release onlyCrossfadeLFO 1 RateLFO 1 AmountLFO 2 RateLFO 2 AmountAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleasePortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter MorphSecondary Filter MorphPanPrimary PanSecondary Pan

Standard MIDIController Numbers

1 Modulation Wheel

2 Breath Controller

3 Pressure (Rev 1 DX7)

4 Foot Pedal

5 Portamento Time

6 Data Entry

7 Volume

8 Balance

9 Undefined

10 Pan

Page 93: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 99

PRESETMENU

Page 94: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual100

Page 95: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 101

PRESET MENU

••• While the Preset menuis activated, incoming MIDIpreset changes are ignored.This is a quick and easyway to temporarily turnMIDI Program Change OFF.

The Preset menu contains functions that can be modified by the userand then saved as preset information in one of the user presets. Forexample, the LFO speed or other parameter can be edited, then thepreset can be saved to a user location (0-127, bank 0).

WARNINGChanges made in the Preset menu will be forever lost unlessthe preset is “saved” using the Save Preset function (page127) before changing the preset.

To enable the Preset menuPress the Preset button, lighting the LED. The current screen willbe the one most recently selected since powering up the machine.The cursor will appear underneath the first character of the screenheading on line one.

To select a new screenPress the Home/Enter button or press a cursor button repeatedlyuntil the cursor is underneath the screen title heading. Rotate thedata entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameterPress the cursor button repeatedly (or hold the right cursor buttonwhile turning the data entry control) until the cursor is under-neath the parameter value. Rotate the data entry control tochange the value.

To compare an edited preset with the original presetPress the preset button, turning off the LED. The unedited presetis now active. Changing the preset number will erase the edit. To hearthe edited preset again, press the Preset button, lighting the LED.The stored version of the preset will be heard whenever you are inthe main screen.

To return to the main screenPress the Preset button, turning off the LED.

Compare Mode must beturned On in the MasterMenu for the Comparefeature to work.

Page 96: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual102

PRESET MENU

PRESET MENU FUNCTIONS

• Preset NamePreset Name allows you to name each of the user presets with a name ofup to 12 characters. Position the cursor under the character locationand use the data entry control to change the character. The keyboardcan also be used to select characters. The chart below shows the key-board character assignment.

PRESET NAME000 Untitled

• Primary InstrumentThis function allows you to select which of the available instrumentsounds (or none) will be placed on the primary layer of the current userpreset.

INSTRUMENT priI003 DancerSynth

• Secondary InstrumentThis function allows you to select which of the available instrumentsounds (or none) will be placed on the secondary layer of the currentuser preset.

INSTRUMENT secI038 Rock Organ

02

3

57

8

:<

>

?A

C

DF

H

JK

M

OP

R

TV

W

Y[

¥

^`

b

ce

g

hj

l

no

q

st

v

xz

<-

+,

.

&'

)

blank

"$

46

9;

=@

B

EG

IL

N

QS

UX

Z

]_

ad

f

ik

mp

r

uw

y|->

-/

1(

*

!#

%

••• Changing the instrumentis a simple way to create anew sound while retaining allother parameters of thepreset.

0

Page 97: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 103

PRESET MENU

• VolumeVolume sets the amplitude of the primary and secondary instruments.This function also allows you to compensate for the relative volumedifferences between instruments.

VOLUMEpri:127 sec:64

• PanPan allows you to independently set the initial pan position of theprimary and secondary instruments. A value of -7 pans the instrumenthard left and a value of +7 pans the instrument hard right. This pansetting is only valid if “P”, for preset pan, is selected in the main display(or the Midimap).

PANpri:-7 sec:+7

• Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range of both primary and secondaryinstruments. This sets the keyboard range for the entire preset and willfurther limit the primary and secondary keyboard ranges. The key rangecan be set anywhere from C-2 to G8.

KEY RANGEC-2 -> G8

C-2 C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8

= Standard 5 Octave Keyboard Range

Morpheus Keyboard RangeMIDIKey #

KeyName

0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 127

Page 98: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual104

• Primary Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range of the primary instrument. This isuseful for creating positional crossfades and keyboard splits between theprimary and secondary layers. The key range can be set anywhere fromC-2 to G8.

KEY RANGE priC-2 -> G8

• Secondary Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range of the secondary instrument. The keyrange can be set anywhere from C-2 to G8.

KEY RANGE secG#4 -> G8

PRESET MENU

This diagram shows how instruments can be layered or “stacked” using the primaryand secondary instruments.

This diagram shows how a “split” keyboard can be programmed using the primaryand secondary instruments.

••• Entire presets can also becombined to form split orlayered keyboards. See thechapter on Hyperpresets inthis manual.

Primary InstrumentKey Range

Key Range

SPLIT KEYBOARD

Secondary Instrument

Pri Instr.

Sec Instr.

LAYERING TWO INSTRUMENTS

Key Range

Page 99: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 105

PRESET MENU

• TransposeThis function allows you to transpose the key of the primary and second-ary instruments in semitone intervals by shifting the keyboard positionrelative to middle C. The transpose range is -36 to +36 semitones.

TRANSPOSEpri:+00 sec:+00

• Coarse Pitch TuningThis function allows you to change the tuning of the primary and sec-ondary instruments in semitone intervals. The coarse tuning range is -36to +36 semitones.

PITCH TUNE crsepri:+00 sec:+00

• Fine Pitch TuningThis function allows you to change the tuning of the primary and sec-ondary instruments in 1/64 semitone intervals (approx. 1.56 cents). Thefine tuning range is ± 1 semitone.

PITCH TUNE finepri:+00 sec:+00

• Alternate Volume Envelope On/OffEach instrument has its own factory preset AHDSR volume envelopewhich is used if this parameter is set to Off. Turn Alternate VolumeEnvelope On to use the user-programmable alternate envelope.

ALT VOL ENVELOPEpri:Off sec:On

••• Use the Coarse Tuningcontrol to change the tuningof multiple drum instruments.

••• Use Transpose when youwant the instrument's timbreto remain constant.

Use Coarse Tuning when youwant to change the timbre ofthe instrument.

Page 100: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual106

• Primary Alternate Envelope ParametersThis function allows you to adjust the alternate volume envelope para-meters for the primary instrument. The parameters are Attack time,Hold time, Decay time, Sustain level, Release time and are adjustablefrom 00 to 99.

P: A H D S R 00 00 00 99 16

• Secondary Alternate Envelope ParametersThis function allows you to adjust the alternate volume envelope para-meters for the secondary instrument. The parameters are Attack time,Hold time, Decay time, Sustain level, Release time and are adjustablefrom 00 to 99.

S: A H D S R 00 00 00 99 16

• Double + DetuneDouble + Detune “thickens” the sound by doubling the sound and thendetuning it. The amount is variable over a range of 1 to 15. WhenDouble + Detune is on, a particular instrument will use twice as manychannels. If Double + Detune is used for both the primary and second-ary instruments, the preset will use four channels per key.

DOUBLE + DETUNEpri:Off sec:07

PRESET MENU

DCA

Atk Dec Rel

NormalEnvelope

Atk Dec Rel

AlternateEnvelope

••• See pages 73-74 for anexplanation of the envelopeparameters.

••• Shortening the attackand release times of theAlternate Envelope canalleviate channel “ripoff”problems. Morpheus exam-ines the Alternate Envelope todetermine if a channel can bereused.

Page 101: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 107

PRESET MENU

• Sound DelaySound Delay varies the time between the arrival of a MIDI Note-Onmessage and the onset of a note. The delay time is adjustable from 0 to14 seconds (000-127).

SOUND DELAYpri:000 sec:000

• Sound StartThis function allows you to set where a sample begins playing whenyou hit a key. A setting of 000 plays a sound from the beginning, highervalues move the sample start point toward the end of the sound.

SOUND STARTpri:000 sec:000

• Sound ReverseWhen sound reverse is turned On, the instrument will be played back-wards. Since instruments tend to sound very different when reversed,this function extends the number of possible sounds in Morpheus.

SOUND REVERSEpri:Off sec:On

The Sound Start parameter allows you to cut off the beginning of the sound. Highervalues move the start point toward the end of the sound.

SoundS t a r t

••• The Sound Startparameter can be useful toremove the gradual attackof a reversed sound. TheLoop Offset parameterscan also be put to gooduse with reversed sounds.

••• See the Step-By-Stepsection of this manual for anapplication using SoundStart.

Page 102: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual108

PRESET MENU

• NontransposeThis function turns keyboard transposition On or Off for the primaryand secondary instruments. With Nontranspose On, the keyboard willnot control the pitch of the instrument. This is a useful function fordrones or “chiffs”, which you may not want to track the keyboard.

NONTRANSPOSEpri:Off sec:On

• Loop EnableThis function allows you to turn the loop in a sound On or Off. Loopingis a way that sounds can be sustained indefinitely. If you want an in-strument to play once, then stop, turn Off the Loop Enable function.

LOOP ENABLEpri:Off sec:On

• Loop OffsetAll the Morpheus instruments have been factory looped for your conve-nience. The Loop Offset function allows you to modify the Loop StartPoint and the Loop Size so you can create your own loops.

By looping the sound on the attack portion of an instrument, you cancreate new waveforms. The Loop Start and Loop Size parameters cancross sample boundaries so that more than one instrument will play.Sample boundary crossing may be useful to create a special effect orbackground ambience. A Start and Size Offset of 000,000 returns you tothe factory loop setting.

LOOP OFFSET LOOP OFFSETStartP +000,000 SizeP +000,000

LOOP OFFSET LOOP OFFSETStartS +000,000 SizeS +000,000

LOOP OFFSET IDEAS••• Loop offset can be usedto create interesting newtimbres by looping on theattack transient of aninstrument.

••• By traversing severalinstruments you may findinteresting polyrhythms.

••• Extremely LONG loopsizes can create incrediblebackground ambience. Usepitch-shifting and multiplekeys.

In some cases, such as theindividual percussion sounds,looping may not be desirable.If this is the case, turn LoopEnable Off.

Primary

Secondary

Page 103: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 109

• Solo ModeSolo mode provides the playing action of a monophonic instrument. Itcan make wind and string instruments sound more realistic by prevent-ing more than one note from sounding at once. Two types of solo modeare provided: Wind Controller mode and Synth mode. In either solomode, if a new note is played while another is being held, the envelopegenerators do not retrigger and the sample remains in the loop. Thisallows a legato playing technique to be used.

Wind ModeThe envelope generator attack always begins at the start of theattack phase when playing staccato. When playing legato, theenvelope generator stays in the sustain phase.

Synth ModeThe envelope generator attack begins at whatever point in therelease phase is in when a new key is pressed. When playing legato,the envelope generator stays in the sustain phase.

SOLO MODEp:Off s:Wind

Changing the Loop Offset Start point moves the loop forward or backward (+ or-)through the sample memory, keeping the loops size constant. Large changes willmove the loop completely out of the original sample.

Changing the Loop Offset Size alters the size of the loop, leaving the loop start pointstationary. Large positive offsets will enlarge the loop to encompass multiple samples.

Piano Choir Strings Brass Synth

Loop Loop+ Start PointLoop

Sample Memory

- Start Point

Strings Brass Synth

Loop

Loop Size

Sample Memory

PRESET MENU

••• Sounds are looped sothat they will continue tosound as long as the key isheld.

••• When using a negativeloop start point, the soundmay jump back to a pointbefore the start of thesample during the loop cycle.

••• Solo Mode allows you tosimulate certain playingtechniques such as“Tongueing” on a saxo-phone, where the attack isonly heard on certain notes.

Page 104: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual110

PRESET MENU

• Solo Mode PriorityWhen multiple notes are played and held in solo mode, the last noteplayed is always heard. As notes are released, the solo mode prioritydetermines which note will take over from the last note played.

• High Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,the highest key being held will play when the last-played key isreleased.

• Low Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,the lowest key being held will play when the last-played key is re-leased.

• First Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,and the last note is released, the note will jump back to the first note.

• Last Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,only the note last pressed will play. If the note is released it jumpsback to the last note before that.

• Drum - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode, only the notelast pressed will play. If the note is released, no jumping occurs.

SOLO PRIORITYp:Low s:Hi

• Portamento RatePortamento is a smooth gliding between notes instead of the normalinstantaneous change in pitch when a new key is pressed. The porta-mento rate is the time it takes to glide to the new pitch. The larger thevalue, the slower the glide rate. The rate is adjustable from 1-127 or itcan be turned Off. Portamento glides at a linear rate between notes andcan be set separately for the primary and secondary layers. Portamentoworks both in and out of Solo Mode.

PORTAMENTO RATEpri:127 sec:Off

• Portamento ShapeThe portamento is variable from convex exponential (8) to linear, forboth the primary and secondary instruments. Using the exponentialshapes, the portamento rate will slow as the note nears its destination.

PORTAMENTO SHAPEpri:Ex4 sec:Lin

There is a four note limitfor remembering notes in theFirst and Last Note Prioritymodes.

The portamento shape canbe varied from linear toconvex exponential.

Ex4

Lin

Ex8

Page 105: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 111

PRESET MENU

To enable the crossfade orcross-switch functions, youmust assign Crossfade to amodulation source in theRealtime or Note-On Modu-lation screen.

••• To use the keyboard forcrossfade, set the CrossfadeBalance to 64 and the KeyCenter to the split point.

••• See also, Cross-SwitchPoint on page 113.

By overlapping the primary and secondary instruments, you can crossfade or cross-switch between the layers.

• Portamento ModeThis function sets the number of notes that will be affected by porta-mento. For example, if the Portamento Mode is set to two keys and athree-note chord is played, only two of the notes will glide. Notes willglide from the previous note or notes played. By setting the number ofkeys to match the number of notes in your chords, smooth glidesbetween those chords can be accomplished without having notes glidein from random starting points. The number of keys can be set frommono to 5 note polyphonic.

PORTAMENTO MODEPoly 2 keys

• Crossfade ModeThis function determines which of the following crossfade modes will beselected: Off, Crossfade, or Cross-Switch.

OffWhen “Off” is selected, crossfade is disabled.

CrossfadeWhen “X-Fade” is selected, a control input is used to fade betweenthe primary and secondary instruments. Any modulation sourcemay be used as an input (velocity, wheel, etc.).

Cross-SwitchWhen “X-Switch” is selected, the secondary layer is selected if theinput crosses a certain threshold or if a footswitch controlling cross-switch is activated. The switch occurs only at the start of the note; nofurther switching takes place while the key is held down. If keyposition or velocity is routed to cross-switch, the threshold is theswitch point. Realtime controllers do not have any effect when routedto cross-switch.

XFADE MODEOff

PrimaryInstrumentKey Range

Key Range

SecondaryInstrument

Crossfade Range

Page 106: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual112

PRESET MENU

In order to use theCrossfade or Cross-Switchfunctions, you must assignCrossfade to a modulationsource in the Realtime orNote-On modulation screens.

••• A Crossfade Balancesetting of 000 would beappropriate with a sourcesuch as a modulation wheelor footpedal, either of whichcan only change the value ina positive direction.

• Crossfade DirectionThis function determines the polarity of the crossfade or cross-switch.The direction is either primary secondary, or secondary primary.

XFADE DIRECTIONPri -> Sec

• Crossfade Balance and AmountThe crossfade balance parameter determines the initial balance betweenthe primary and secondary layers. Higher values shift the balance to thesecondary instrument. When the Crossfade Direction is Pri->Sec, Modu-lation subtracts from the primary volume and adds to the secondaryvolume. When crossfade modulation and balance equal 64, the twoinstruments are at equal volume.

The crossfade amount parameter determines the range over whichcrossfading will occur. Crossfade amount is variable from 000 to 255.The larger the value, the more modulation will be required to effect acomplete crossfade.

XFADE BAL AMT 064 128

0 255

Pri Sec Medium Crossfade Amount

0 255

Pri Sec

0 255

Pri Sec

Balance + Mod

Balance + Mod

Balance + Mod

Large Crossfade Amount

Small Crossfade Amount

Modulation and Crossfade balance are added together to determine the mixture ofprimary and secondary instruments. Higher values increase the secondary volume.

Page 107: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 113

• Cross-Switch PointThe cross-switch point determines the point at which cross-switchingwill occur when key position or velocity is controlling cross-switch.

XSWITCH POINT064 (E3)

• Primary Filter TypeThis screen allows you to select one of 197 Z-Plane filter types availablein ROM. These filters include: traditional low-pass filters, flanger simu-lators, vowel formants, distortion filters, acoustic instrument modelsand many, many more. See the reference section for a complete listingand descriptions of the filters.

FILTER TYPE priF035 Ee-Yi.4

• Secondary Filter TypeThis screen allows you to set the filter type for the secondary layer. SeePrimary Filter Type.

FILTER TYPE secF139 MidFeedBk2

• Filter LevelThis function sets the amount of signal into the filter. This control canbe used to balance the levels between instruments or to control thedistortion characteristics of the filter. Depending on the type of instru-ment and the filter, this control can have a dramatic effect on thesound. This control differs from the Volume parameter which adjuststhe volume after the filter. The default setting is 255 (full level).

FILTER LEVELpri:198 sec:255

Velocity Key

To enable the Cross-switchfunction, you must assignCrossfade to a modulationsource in the Note-on orRealtime Cords screens.

PRESET MENU

Under certain unusualcircumstances the filters mayoverload, producing a loudobjectionable noise. Turndown the Filter Level value toalleviate the problem.

Page 108: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual114

PRESET MENU

• Morph OffsetThis function allows you to set the initial point in the filter morph withno modulation applied. Subsequent modulation will be added or sub-tracted to this value.

MORPH OFFSETpri:096 sec:000

The Morph Offset sets the point along the morph axis where the filter starts with nomodulation applied.

• Filter Frequency TrackingIf the filter frequency remains constant as the pitch of a sound is varied,the timbre of the sound will change with pitch. A way to correct this isto have the filter's frequency track the pitch of the note. This func-tion sets the initial frequency of the filter's pitch tracking. Ingeneral, you can think of frequency tracking as a tone control. In orderto have keyboard tracking, you must also patch the “Keyboard to FilterFrequency Tracking” in the Note-On modulation screen.

FILT FREQ TRACKpri:000 sec:000

••• In many of the filters,the Filter FrequencyTracking works like a tonecontrol which brightens ordarkens the sound.

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

Morph

A Filter

B Filter

Morph

Page 109: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 115

PRESET MENU

Filter Frequency Tracking allows the timbre of the sound to remain constant up anddown the keyboard (if Key Number is routed to this parameter).

Key Number

Morph(Envelope, Wheel,LFO, etc.)

Filter Frequency Tracking

Frequency

Each Morpheus filter is actually constructed of up to eight different complex filters.

• Filter Transform 2Suppose we added yet another dimension to the filter model. We havethe realtime Morph parameter, the Frequency Tracking parameter (set atnote-on time) and one more parameter, perhaps controlling theamount of the filter peaks with key velocity. A way to visualize a three-dimensional filter model is shown in the diagram below.

Key Number

Frequency Tracking

Tran

sfor

m 2

Vel

oci

ty

Mor

ph

Mor

ph

Tran

sfor

m 2

Tran

sfor

m 2

Mor

ph

Tran

sfor

m 2

Real-T

ime

Mor

ph

Frequency Tracking

Frequency Tracking

Frequency Tracking

Page 110: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual116

Each axis of the three-dimensional cube changes the filter in a differentway. In the example above, key number is being applied to the Fre-quency Tracking parameter in order to make the filter frequency trackor follow the notes played on the keyboard.

In the 3-D filter model, there is another note-on (defined at the time thenote is pressed) parameter, Transform 2. Unlike the frequency trackingparameter, the effect of Transform 2 varies from filter to filter. In theexample above, Transform 2 is being used to vary the size of the peaksand notches in the filter. The frequency plots in the upper plane of thecube have sharper peaks. In the example above, key velocity is beingused to control Transform 2 and the sharpness of the filter peaks.

Filter Transform 2 sets the Initial Point along the Transform 2 axis.Subsequent modulation (from note-on modulation) adds to this initialsetting for the primary and secondary filters.

FILT TRANSFORM 2pri:000 sec:127

• Filter ReverseThis function allows you to reverse the direction of all of the filtercontrols. Key Tracking, Transform 2 and the Morph parameters will alloperate in reverse. The Offset points are reversed, as well as the direc-tion of filter modulation.

FILTER REVERSEpri:Off sec:Off

• Auxiliary EnvelopeThis is a supplementary, utility envelope that can be routed to anyrealtime control destination including the Morph filter. The auxiliaryenvelope parameters are: Envelope Amount, Delay, Attack Time, HoldTime, Decay Time, Sustain Level, and Release Time. The delay time isvariable from 0 to 13 seconds (000-127). The envelope amount is vari-able from -128 to +127. Negative values will produce invertedenvelopes.

AUX ENV AMT DLY A: A H D S R +127 000 00 00 00 99 20

PRESET MENU

••• For more information onthe Envelopes, see the PresetProgramming section of thismanual.

••• The filters labeled with“.4” in their name do not usethe Transform 2 parameter.

Page 111: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 117

• LFO 1 - Shape & AmountThis screen controls the waveshape and amount of Low FrequencyOscillator 1. The LFO can be used to produce vibrato (when routed topitch), or tremolo (when routed to volume). The LFO can be routed tocontrol any of the Realtime Modulation destinations (page 123). Thefive LFO waveshapes are: Triangle, Sine, Square, Sawtooth, and Ran-dom. The amount can be varied from -128 to +127. Negative values willproduce inverted waveshapes.

LFO1 SHAPE AMT Rand +127

• LFO 1 - Rate, Delay & VariationThis screen controls the rate, delay and variation of LFO 1.

LFO RateVaries the LFO speed from 0.052 Hz to 25 Hz (000-127).

LFO DelaySets the amount of time between hitting a key and the onset ofmodulation. This can be used to simulate an effect often used byacoustic instrument players, where the vibrato is brought in onlyafter the initial note pitch has been established. The delay range isvariable from 0 to 13 seconds (000-127).

LFO VariationSets the amount of random variation of an LFO each time a key ispressed. This function is useful for ensemble effects, where eachnote played has a slightly different modulation rate. The higherthe number, the greater the note to note variation in LFO rate.LFO variation is variable from 000-127.

LFO1 RT DLY VAR 000 000 000

PRESET MENU

••• For more information onthe LFOs, see the PresetProgramming section of thismanual.

Triangle

Square

Sine

Sawtooth

Random

Page 112: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual118

PRESET MENU

The Function Generator contains eight segments, each with a level and time param-eter.

L1

T1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8T2 T3

T4T5

T6 T7 T8

••• For more information onFunction Generators, see thePreset Programming sectionof this manual.

• LFO 2 - Shape & AmountLFO 2 is functionally identical to LFO 1.

• LFO 2 - Rate, Delay & VariationLFO 2 is functionally identical to LFO 1.

• Function Generators 1 and 2The Function Generators are eight segment modulation sources withconditional jumping capabilities and selectable segment shapes. Leveland Time parameters are provided for each stage. In addition, the shapeof each stage can be individually selected from a palette of 63 shapes.The function generator can be used when you want complex and pre-cise control over a parameter. Through the creative use of its condi-tional jumps and curves, the function generator can serve as a complexLFO, a complex envelope generator, a mini-sequencer, a random sourceor all at once if you desire.

FUNC GEN F1S1Level +124

Segment Number

Parameter Value/Shape

Function Generator 1 or 2

Level +127Time 0750msShape LinearCondJump NeverCondValue +000CondDestSeg 2

FunctionGeneratorParameters

••• Routing the FunctionGenerator to control Pitchmakes it easy to hear whatyou are doing.

Page 113: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 119

PRESET MENU

The function generator can have up to eight segments, each with a Leveland a Time parameter. The level parameter can be either positive ornegative. Each segment of the function generator can have a differentShape. There are 63 different shapes consisting of various curves,straight and crooked line segments, random, chaos and delays.

FUNC GEN F1S1Level +124

Fast Line 2

Circle 16 R

Chaos 6 Random K

Chaos

Linear

Expon

entia

lExp

+1

Four of the 63 curves are shown below. By combining the various curveshapes, extremely complex functions can be created. See the ReferenceSection of this manual for the complete set of function generator curvediagrams.

Function GeneratorCurvesLinearExponential +1Exponential +2Exponential +3Exponential +4Exponential +5Exponential +6Exponential +7Circle 1.4Circle 1.6Circle 1.8Circle 1.16SqueezeFast Line 1Fast Line 2Fast Line 3Medium Line 1Medium Line 2Slow Ramp 1Slow Ramp 2BloomBloom 2Circle 1.16 ReverseCircle 1.8 ReverseCircle 1.6 ReverseCircle 1.4 ReverseSlow Curve 1Slow Curve 2Delay DCDC DelayCurve 2xCurve 2x BCurve 2x CZiz Zag 1Ziz Zag 2Ziz Zag 3Chaos 03, 06, 12, 16, 25, 33,

37, 50, 66, 75, 95, 99Linear Shuffle 1Linear Shuffle 2Random A-LRandom Z

Page 114: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual120

PRESET MENU

The function generator can be programmed to jump between segmentsbased on certain conditions. Because the decision to jump is based onconditions, these jumps are called Conditional Jumps. For example, thefunction generator could be programmed to loop only if the key is stillbeing held. In the diagram below, the function generator has beenprogrammed to jump back to segment 3 if the key is held but jump tosegment 4 whenever the key is released.

1

2

3

4

If Note Off Jump to 4 at End of Segment

5 6 7 8If Note OffImmediately Jump to 4

If Note OnImmediately Jump to 3

Conditional jumps can be programmed to jump to the destinationsegment immediately or they can wait until the end of the segmentbefore jumping. The conditional jumps are:

Never .......................... Never jumps. Always goes on to next segment.

Always End .............. Always jumps at the end of the current segment.

Note On End ............. Jumps at the end of the segment if the note is stillon.

Note On Immed. ...... Jumps immediately if the note is still on.

Note Off End ............ Jumps at the end of the segment if the note is off.

Note Off Immed. ..... Jumps immediately if the note is off.

LFO 1 or 2 End ......... Jumps at the end of the segment if the value of theselected LFO is equal or greater than theconditional value.

Footsw. 1-3 End ....... Jumps at the end of the segment if the selectedfootswitch is pressed.

Footsw. 1-3 Immed. Jumps immediately if the selected footswitch ispressed.

Velocity End ............ Jumps at the end of the segment if the velocityvalue is greater than a positive conditional valueor less than a negative conditional value. See thefollowing page.

Key End ..................... Jumps at the end of the segment if the note valueis greater than a positive conditional value or lessthan a negative conditional value. See thefollowing page.

Remember to turn up theLFO amount when usingLFOs as conditionals.

••• A Conditional Jumpalways goes to the Begin-ning of the destinationsegment.

Page 115: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 121

PRESET MENU

For Velocity End & Key End

FUNC GEN F1S1CondValue +064

FUNC GEN F1S1CondValue -064

••• When one segment jumps to another at a different level, a smoothtransition is made between the two. The time to the end of the destina-tion segment remains as specified.

When the value is Negative, a jumpoccurs if the velocity or key numberis Less than value shown (ignoringthe sign).

When the value is Positive, a jumpoccurs if the velocity or key numberis Greater than value shown.

1

23

4

5

Time = .4 sec

Jump

Time = .4 sec

In the example above, segment 4 has been skipped, but the time to the end ofsegment 5 will remain the same (400 milliseconds). This will alter the slope ofsegment 5.• Function Generator AmountThis control scales the output of the function generator before it isapplied to a modulation destination (in the Realtime Control screen).The amount is like a water faucet. It controls “how much” of the func-tion generator is output. If a negative value is selected, the functiongenerator output will be inverted. Function generator 1 or 2 is selectedon the top line of the display (F1 or F2).

FUNC GEN AMT F1+064

••• Remember that you mustassign the function generatorto a destination in theRealtime Control screen.

••• The Function Genera-tor Amount can also bemodulated by a RealtimeControl source.

••• Drawing your functiongenerator ideas on paper firstwill simplify the program-ming process.

Page 116: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual122

PRESET MENU

• Note-On Modulation ControlThese functions allow you to route Note-On information (informationreceived at note-on time such as velocity or key number) to any of themodulation destinations. Up to 10 simultaneous paths or “patches”may be programmed. For each modulation patch, there is a source, adestination and a corresponding amount parameter which is variablefrom -128 to +127. Place the cursor under the appropriate parameterand change the patch number, modulation source, modulationdestination, or the amount, using the data entry control. If a param-eter is not labeled either primary or secondary, it affects both.

NOTE-ON CTRL #0V Volume +000

Note-OnModulation SourcesKey Number, Key VelocityInitial Pitch Wheel AmountInitial Controller A AmountInitial Controller B AmountInitial Controller C AmountInitial Controller D AmountInitial Mono Pressure AmountInitial FR Function Gen.Amount

DestinationsOffPitch, Primary PitchSecondary PitchVolume, Primary VolumeSecondary VolumeAttack, Primary AttackSecondary AttackDecay, Primary DecaySecondary DecayRelease, Primary ReleaseSecondary ReleaseCrossfadeLFO 1 Amount, LFO 1 RateLFO 2 Amount, LFO 2 RateAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleaseFunction Gen 1 AmountFunction Gen 2 AmountPortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter MorphSecondary Filter MorphPan, Primary PanSecondary PanSample StartPrimary Sample StartSecondary Sample StartTone, Primary ToneSecondary ToneFilter Level, Primary Filter LevelSecondary Filter Level,Filter Freq. Tracking,Primary Filter Freq. TrackingSecondary Filter Freq. TrackingFilter Transform 2Primary Filter Transform 2Secondary Filter Transform 2

LFO 1

Amount Rate

LFO 2

Amount Rate

R

LVolume

PanPrimary

InstrumentPitch

SampleStart

Tone

VELOCITY

VELOCITYCURVE

KEY NUMBER

KEYBOARDCENTER

Note-On Modulation Sources

X-Fade

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

R

LVolume

PanSecondaryInstrument

PitchSampleStart

Tone

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

PortamentoRate

DCA

DCA

Modulation Destinations

AuxiliaryDAHDSR

AmtAtk Dec Rel

CONTROLLERA-B-C-D

(INITIAL SETTING)

PRESSURE(INITIAL SETTING)

FR FUNCTIONGENERATOR(INITIAL SETTING)

PITCH WHEEL(INITIAL SETTING)

FunctionGenerator 1

AmountCond

FunctionGenerator 2

AmountCond

Z-PlaneFilter

T2TrkMorphAttn.

Z-PlaneFilter

T2TrkMorphAttn.

Page 117: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 123

PRESET MENU

• Realtime Modulation ControlThese functions allow you to route realtime controllers to any of themodulation destinations except Tone, Sample Start, Filter FrequencyTracking and Filter Transform 2. Up to 10 simultaneous patches may beprogrammed. For each modulation patch, there is a source and a desti-nation parameter. Place the cursor under the appropriate parameterand change the patch number, modulation source, modulationdestination, or the amount using the data entry control. If a param-eter is not labeled either primary or secondary, it affects both.

REALTIME CTL #0PWhl Off +127

When Modulating Enve-lope Attack, Decay orRelease Times:

Positive amounts of modula-tion increase the time.

Negative amounts of modu-lation decrease the time.

RealtimeModulation SourcesPitch WheelMIDI Control AMIDI Control BMIDI Control CMIDI Control DMono PressurePolyphonic PressureLFO 1, LFO 2Auxiliary EnvelopeFunction Generator 1Function Generator 2Free-Run Function Generator

DestinationsOffPitch, Primary PitchSecondary PitchVolume, Primary VolumeSecondary VolumeAttack, Primary AttackSecondary AttackDecay, Primary DecaySecondary DecayRelease, Primary ReleaseSecondary ReleaseCrossfadeLFO 1 Amount, LFO 1 RateLFO 2 Amount, LFO 2 RateAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleaseFunction Gen 1 AmountFunction Gen 2 AmountPortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter Morph,Secondary Filter MorphPan, Primary PanSecondary Pan

Realtime Modulation Sources

POLYPRESSURE

MONOPRESSURE

MIDICONTROLLER

A/B/C/DLFO 2

AUXILIARYENVELOPELFO 1PITCH WHEEL

AuxiliaryDAHDSR

AmtAtk Dec Rel

LFO 1

Amount Rate

LFO 2

Amount Rate

Modulation Destinations

R

LVolume

Pan

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

PrimaryInstrument

Pitch

ToneZ-Plane

Filter

X-Fade

R

LVolume

Pan

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

SecondaryInstrument

Pitch

ToneZ-Plane

Filter

Morph

Morph

PortamentoRate

DCA

DCA

FUNCTIONGENERATOR

FREE-RUNFUNCTION

GENERATOR

FunctionGenerator 1

Amt

FunctionGenerator 2

Amt

Page 118: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual124

PRESET MENU

• Footswitch ControlThis function allows you to route the 3 footswitch controllers (1, 2 or 3)to any of the footswitch destinations. The footswitches can be routed toswitch: Sustain (pri/sec/both), alternate volume envelope (pri/sec/both),alternate volume release (pri/sec/both), cross-switch between the pri-mary and secondary instruments or switch portamento Off or On (pri/sec/both).

FOOTSWITCH CTRL1 -> Sustain

• Pitch Bend RangeThis function allows you to specify the pitch wheel range for the cur-rent preset if pitch bend is not being globally controlled in the Mastermenu. Pitch bend range is only used when the pitch wheel is used tocontrol pitch.

PITCH BEND RANGE+- 12 semitones

• Pressure AmountThis function allows you to specify an overall amount parameter formono or poly keyboard pressure data (pre-patch cord). The pressureamount is variable from -128 to +127.

PRESSURE AMOUNT+127

• MIDI Controller AmountThis function allows you to specify an overall amount parameter (pre-patch cord) which variable from -128 to +127 for each of the MIDIcontrollers.

CONTROLLER AMT CONTROLLER AMTA:+127 B:+127 C:+127 D:+127

Pressure Amount andController A-B-C-D Amountare MASTER Controls whichaffect the amount of modula-tion which can beprogrammed in the RealtimeModulation section.

In order for the RealtimeModulation Control amountsfor these functions to have afull range of control, thePressure and Controller A-Damounts must be set to+127.

Page 119: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 125

PRESET MENU

• Velocity CurveIncoming velocity data can be modified by a velocity curve in order toprovide different types of dynamics in response to your playing or betteradapt to the MIDI controller. This function allows you to select one ofthe four velocity curves or leave the velocity data unaltered (Off). Inaddition, the velocity curve can be set to “Global”, which means thatthe global velocity curve (programmed in the Master menu) is used.

VELOCITY CURVEGlobal

Curve 3

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 1

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 4

Curve 2

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Page 120: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual126

PRESET MENU

• Keyboard CenterThe Keyboard Center parameter establishes a reference point for key-board modulation. Keys above this point will have a positive value andkeys below it will be negative. The keyboard center can be set to any keywithin the range C-2 to G8.

KEYBOARD CENTERC#3

KEY CENTER

+

-

0

-

+

• Keyboard TuningIn addition to the standard equally divided octave tuning, Morpheuscontains four other types of scale tuning and one user-definable tuning.This function selects which tuning will be used in the current preset.

The choices of keyboard tunings are:

Equal tuning (12 tone equal temperament)Standard Western tuning.

Just C tuning (just intonation)Based on small interval ratios. Sweet and pure, non-beatingintervals.

Vallotti tuning (Vallotti & Young non-equal temperament)Similar to 12 tone equal temperament. For a given scale, each keyhas a different character.

19 Tone tuning (19 tone equal temperament)19 notes per octave. Difficult to play, but works well with a se-quencer.

Gamelan (Javanese) tuning (5 tone Slendro and 7 tone Pelog)Pelog-white keys, Slendro-black keys. Exotic tunings of Gamelanflavor.

User tuningDefined in the Master menu.

Page 121: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 127

PRESET MENU

• Mix SelectThis function allows you to direct a particular preset to one of the fourdestinations (Main, Sub 1, FXA, FXB). This routing is utilized if MixSelect for a particular MIDI channel is set to “Preset” in the currentMidimap. Otherwise this setting is ignored. This function allows you tochoose the effect bus in the preset rather than by MIDI channel.

MIX OUTPUTMain

• Save PresetChanges made to a preset in the Preset Edit menu are not made perma-nent until the preset is Saved. To save a preset, move the cursor to thebottom line and select the location for the new preset with the dataentry control. The Enter LED will then flash. Pressing the Enter buttonwill confirm the operation.

Any user preset (000-127, bank 0) or RAM card location (000-127, bank3) may be selected using the data entry control. Writing to a user preseterases the existing preset in that location. Make sure that the destina-tion preset does not contain information that you want to keep.

SAVE PRESET to064 Preset Name

In order for the Preset MixSelect to be utilized, theMidimap Mix select must beset to “Preset”.

0

Page 122: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual128

Page 123: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 99

PRESETMENU

Page 124: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual100

Page 125: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 101

PRESET MENU

••• While the Preset menuis activated, incoming MIDIpreset changes are ignored.This is a quick and easyway to temporarily turnMIDI Program Change OFF.

The Preset menu contains functions that can be modified by the userand then saved as preset information in one of the user presets. Forexample, the LFO speed or other parameter can be edited, then thepreset can be saved to a user location (0-127, bank 0).

WARNINGChanges made in the Preset menu will be forever lost unlessthe preset is “saved” using the Save Preset function (page127) before changing the preset.

To enable the Preset menuPress the Preset button, lighting the LED. The current screen willbe the one most recently selected since powering up the machine.The cursor will appear underneath the first character of the screenheading on line one.

To select a new screenPress the Home/Enter button or press a cursor button repeatedlyuntil the cursor is underneath the screen title heading. Rotate thedata entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameterPress the cursor button repeatedly (or hold the right cursor buttonwhile turning the data entry control) until the cursor is under-neath the parameter value. Rotate the data entry control tochange the value.

To compare an edited preset with the original presetPress the preset button, turning off the LED. The unedited presetis now active. Changing the preset number will erase the edit. To hearthe edited preset again, press the Preset button, lighting the LED.The stored version of the preset will be heard whenever you are inthe main screen.

To return to the main screenPress the Preset button, turning off the LED.

Compare Mode must beturned On in the MasterMenu for the Comparefeature to work.

Page 126: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual102

PRESET MENU

PRESET MENU FUNCTIONS

• Preset NamePreset Name allows you to name each of the user presets with a name ofup to 12 characters. Position the cursor under the character locationand use the data entry control to change the character. The keyboardcan also be used to select characters. The chart below shows the key-board character assignment.

PRESET NAME000 Untitled

• Primary InstrumentThis function allows you to select which of the available instrumentsounds (or none) will be placed on the primary layer of the current userpreset.

INSTRUMENT priI003 DancerSynth

• Secondary InstrumentThis function allows you to select which of the available instrumentsounds (or none) will be placed on the secondary layer of the currentuser preset.

INSTRUMENT secI038 Rock Organ

02

3

57

8

:<

>

?A

C

DF

H

JK

M

OP

R

TV

W

Y[

¥

^`

b

ce

g

hj

l

no

q

st

v

xz

<-

+,

.

&'

)

blank

"$

46

9;

=@

B

EG

IL

N

QS

UX

Z

]_

ad

f

ik

mp

r

uw

y|->

-/

1(

*

!#

%

••• Changing the instrumentis a simple way to create anew sound while retaining allother parameters of thepreset.

0

Page 127: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 103

PRESET MENU

• VolumeVolume sets the amplitude of the primary and secondary instruments.This function also allows you to compensate for the relative volumedifferences between instruments.

VOLUMEpri:127 sec:64

• PanPan allows you to independently set the initial pan position of theprimary and secondary instruments. A value of -7 pans the instrumenthard left and a value of +7 pans the instrument hard right. This pansetting is only valid if “P”, for preset pan, is selected in the main display(or the Midimap).

PANpri:-7 sec:+7

• Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range of both primary and secondaryinstruments. This sets the keyboard range for the entire preset and willfurther limit the primary and secondary keyboard ranges. The key rangecan be set anywhere from C-2 to G8.

KEY RANGEC-2 -> G8

C-2 C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8

= Standard 5 Octave Keyboard Range

Morpheus Keyboard RangeMIDIKey #

KeyName

0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 127

Page 128: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual104

• Primary Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range of the primary instrument. This isuseful for creating positional crossfades and keyboard splits between theprimary and secondary layers. The key range can be set anywhere fromC-2 to G8.

KEY RANGE priC-2 -> G8

• Secondary Key RangeKey range sets the keyboard range of the secondary instrument. The keyrange can be set anywhere from C-2 to G8.

KEY RANGE secG#4 -> G8

PRESET MENU

This diagram shows how instruments can be layered or “stacked” using the primaryand secondary instruments.

This diagram shows how a “split” keyboard can be programmed using the primaryand secondary instruments.

••• Entire presets can also becombined to form split orlayered keyboards. See thechapter on Hyperpresets inthis manual.

Primary InstrumentKey Range

Key Range

SPLIT KEYBOARD

Secondary Instrument

Pri Instr.

Sec Instr.

LAYERING TWO INSTRUMENTS

Key Range

Page 129: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 105

PRESET MENU

• TransposeThis function allows you to transpose the key of the primary and second-ary instruments in semitone intervals by shifting the keyboard positionrelative to middle C. The transpose range is -36 to +36 semitones.

TRANSPOSEpri:+00 sec:+00

• Coarse Pitch TuningThis function allows you to change the tuning of the primary and sec-ondary instruments in semitone intervals. The coarse tuning range is -36to +36 semitones.

PITCH TUNE crsepri:+00 sec:+00

• Fine Pitch TuningThis function allows you to change the tuning of the primary and sec-ondary instruments in 1/64 semitone intervals (approx. 1.56 cents). Thefine tuning range is ± 1 semitone.

PITCH TUNE finepri:+00 sec:+00

• Alternate Volume Envelope On/OffEach instrument has its own factory preset AHDSR volume envelopewhich is used if this parameter is set to Off. Turn Alternate VolumeEnvelope On to use the user-programmable alternate envelope.

ALT VOL ENVELOPEpri:Off sec:On

••• Use the Coarse Tuningcontrol to change the tuningof multiple drum instruments.

••• Use Transpose when youwant the instrument's timbreto remain constant.

Use Coarse Tuning when youwant to change the timbre ofthe instrument.

Page 130: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual106

• Primary Alternate Envelope ParametersThis function allows you to adjust the alternate volume envelope para-meters for the primary instrument. The parameters are Attack time,Hold time, Decay time, Sustain level, Release time and are adjustablefrom 00 to 99.

P: A H D S R 00 00 00 99 16

• Secondary Alternate Envelope ParametersThis function allows you to adjust the alternate volume envelope para-meters for the secondary instrument. The parameters are Attack time,Hold time, Decay time, Sustain level, Release time and are adjustablefrom 00 to 99.

S: A H D S R 00 00 00 99 16

• Double + DetuneDouble + Detune “thickens” the sound by doubling the sound and thendetuning it. The amount is variable over a range of 1 to 15. WhenDouble + Detune is on, a particular instrument will use twice as manychannels. If Double + Detune is used for both the primary and second-ary instruments, the preset will use four channels per key.

DOUBLE + DETUNEpri:Off sec:07

PRESET MENU

DCA

Atk Dec Rel

NormalEnvelope

Atk Dec Rel

AlternateEnvelope

••• See pages 73-74 for anexplanation of the envelopeparameters.

••• Shortening the attackand release times of theAlternate Envelope canalleviate channel “ripoff”problems. Morpheus exam-ines the Alternate Envelope todetermine if a channel can bereused.

Page 131: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 107

PRESET MENU

• Sound DelaySound Delay varies the time between the arrival of a MIDI Note-Onmessage and the onset of a note. The delay time is adjustable from 0 to14 seconds (000-127).

SOUND DELAYpri:000 sec:000

• Sound StartThis function allows you to set where a sample begins playing whenyou hit a key. A setting of 000 plays a sound from the beginning, highervalues move the sample start point toward the end of the sound.

SOUND STARTpri:000 sec:000

• Sound ReverseWhen sound reverse is turned On, the instrument will be played back-wards. Since instruments tend to sound very different when reversed,this function extends the number of possible sounds in Morpheus.

SOUND REVERSEpri:Off sec:On

The Sound Start parameter allows you to cut off the beginning of the sound. Highervalues move the start point toward the end of the sound.

SoundS t a r t

••• The Sound Startparameter can be useful toremove the gradual attackof a reversed sound. TheLoop Offset parameterscan also be put to gooduse with reversed sounds.

••• See the Step-By-Stepsection of this manual for anapplication using SoundStart.

Page 132: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual108

PRESET MENU

• NontransposeThis function turns keyboard transposition On or Off for the primaryand secondary instruments. With Nontranspose On, the keyboard willnot control the pitch of the instrument. This is a useful function fordrones or “chiffs”, which you may not want to track the keyboard.

NONTRANSPOSEpri:Off sec:On

• Loop EnableThis function allows you to turn the loop in a sound On or Off. Loopingis a way that sounds can be sustained indefinitely. If you want an in-strument to play once, then stop, turn Off the Loop Enable function.

LOOP ENABLEpri:Off sec:On

• Loop OffsetAll the Morpheus instruments have been factory looped for your conve-nience. The Loop Offset function allows you to modify the Loop StartPoint and the Loop Size so you can create your own loops.

By looping the sound on the attack portion of an instrument, you cancreate new waveforms. The Loop Start and Loop Size parameters cancross sample boundaries so that more than one instrument will play.Sample boundary crossing may be useful to create a special effect orbackground ambience. A Start and Size Offset of 000,000 returns you tothe factory loop setting.

LOOP OFFSET LOOP OFFSETStartP +000,000 SizeP +000,000

LOOP OFFSET LOOP OFFSETStartS +000,000 SizeS +000,000

LOOP OFFSET IDEAS••• Loop offset can be usedto create interesting newtimbres by looping on theattack transient of aninstrument.

••• By traversing severalinstruments you may findinteresting polyrhythms.

••• Extremely LONG loopsizes can create incrediblebackground ambience. Usepitch-shifting and multiplekeys.

In some cases, such as theindividual percussion sounds,looping may not be desirable.If this is the case, turn LoopEnable Off.

Primary

Secondary

Page 133: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 109

• Solo ModeSolo mode provides the playing action of a monophonic instrument. Itcan make wind and string instruments sound more realistic by prevent-ing more than one note from sounding at once. Two types of solo modeare provided: Wind Controller mode and Synth mode. In either solomode, if a new note is played while another is being held, the envelopegenerators do not retrigger and the sample remains in the loop. Thisallows a legato playing technique to be used.

Wind ModeThe envelope generator attack always begins at the start of theattack phase when playing staccato. When playing legato, theenvelope generator stays in the sustain phase.

Synth ModeThe envelope generator attack begins at whatever point in therelease phase is in when a new key is pressed. When playing legato,the envelope generator stays in the sustain phase.

SOLO MODEp:Off s:Wind

Changing the Loop Offset Start point moves the loop forward or backward (+ or-)through the sample memory, keeping the loops size constant. Large changes willmove the loop completely out of the original sample.

Changing the Loop Offset Size alters the size of the loop, leaving the loop start pointstationary. Large positive offsets will enlarge the loop to encompass multiple samples.

Piano Choir Strings Brass Synth

Loop Loop+ Start PointLoop

Sample Memory

- Start Point

Strings Brass Synth

Loop

Loop Size

Sample Memory

PRESET MENU

••• Sounds are looped sothat they will continue tosound as long as the key isheld.

••• When using a negativeloop start point, the soundmay jump back to a pointbefore the start of thesample during the loop cycle.

••• Solo Mode allows you tosimulate certain playingtechniques such as“Tongueing” on a saxo-phone, where the attack isonly heard on certain notes.

Page 134: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual110

PRESET MENU

• Solo Mode PriorityWhen multiple notes are played and held in solo mode, the last noteplayed is always heard. As notes are released, the solo mode prioritydetermines which note will take over from the last note played.

• High Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,the highest key being held will play when the last-played key isreleased.

• Low Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,the lowest key being held will play when the last-played key is re-leased.

• First Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,and the last note is released, the note will jump back to the first note.

• Last Note Priority - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode,only the note last pressed will play. If the note is released it jumpsback to the last note before that.

• Drum - If multiple notes are being held in solo mode, only the notelast pressed will play. If the note is released, no jumping occurs.

SOLO PRIORITYp:Low s:Hi

• Portamento RatePortamento is a smooth gliding between notes instead of the normalinstantaneous change in pitch when a new key is pressed. The porta-mento rate is the time it takes to glide to the new pitch. The larger thevalue, the slower the glide rate. The rate is adjustable from 1-127 or itcan be turned Off. Portamento glides at a linear rate between notes andcan be set separately for the primary and secondary layers. Portamentoworks both in and out of Solo Mode.

PORTAMENTO RATEpri:127 sec:Off

• Portamento ShapeThe portamento is variable from convex exponential (8) to linear, forboth the primary and secondary instruments. Using the exponentialshapes, the portamento rate will slow as the note nears its destination.

PORTAMENTO SHAPEpri:Ex4 sec:Lin

There is a four note limitfor remembering notes in theFirst and Last Note Prioritymodes.

The portamento shape canbe varied from linear toconvex exponential.

Ex4

Lin

Ex8

Page 135: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 111

PRESET MENU

To enable the crossfade orcross-switch functions, youmust assign Crossfade to amodulation source in theRealtime or Note-On Modu-lation screen.

••• To use the keyboard forcrossfade, set the CrossfadeBalance to 64 and the KeyCenter to the split point.

••• See also, Cross-SwitchPoint on page 113.

By overlapping the primary and secondary instruments, you can crossfade or cross-switch between the layers.

• Portamento ModeThis function sets the number of notes that will be affected by porta-mento. For example, if the Portamento Mode is set to two keys and athree-note chord is played, only two of the notes will glide. Notes willglide from the previous note or notes played. By setting the number ofkeys to match the number of notes in your chords, smooth glidesbetween those chords can be accomplished without having notes glidein from random starting points. The number of keys can be set frommono to 5 note polyphonic.

PORTAMENTO MODEPoly 2 keys

• Crossfade ModeThis function determines which of the following crossfade modes will beselected: Off, Crossfade, or Cross-Switch.

OffWhen “Off” is selected, crossfade is disabled.

CrossfadeWhen “X-Fade” is selected, a control input is used to fade betweenthe primary and secondary instruments. Any modulation sourcemay be used as an input (velocity, wheel, etc.).

Cross-SwitchWhen “X-Switch” is selected, the secondary layer is selected if theinput crosses a certain threshold or if a footswitch controlling cross-switch is activated. The switch occurs only at the start of the note; nofurther switching takes place while the key is held down. If keyposition or velocity is routed to cross-switch, the threshold is theswitch point. Realtime controllers do not have any effect when routedto cross-switch.

XFADE MODEOff

PrimaryInstrumentKey Range

Key Range

SecondaryInstrument

Crossfade Range

Page 136: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual112

PRESET MENU

In order to use theCrossfade or Cross-Switchfunctions, you must assignCrossfade to a modulationsource in the Realtime orNote-On modulation screens.

••• A Crossfade Balancesetting of 000 would beappropriate with a sourcesuch as a modulation wheelor footpedal, either of whichcan only change the value ina positive direction.

• Crossfade DirectionThis function determines the polarity of the crossfade or cross-switch.The direction is either primary secondary, or secondary primary.

XFADE DIRECTIONPri -> Sec

• Crossfade Balance and AmountThe crossfade balance parameter determines the initial balance betweenthe primary and secondary layers. Higher values shift the balance to thesecondary instrument. When the Crossfade Direction is Pri->Sec, Modu-lation subtracts from the primary volume and adds to the secondaryvolume. When crossfade modulation and balance equal 64, the twoinstruments are at equal volume.

The crossfade amount parameter determines the range over whichcrossfading will occur. Crossfade amount is variable from 000 to 255.The larger the value, the more modulation will be required to effect acomplete crossfade.

XFADE BAL AMT 064 128

0 255

Pri Sec Medium Crossfade Amount

0 255

Pri Sec

0 255

Pri Sec

Balance + Mod

Balance + Mod

Balance + Mod

Large Crossfade Amount

Small Crossfade Amount

Modulation and Crossfade balance are added together to determine the mixture ofprimary and secondary instruments. Higher values increase the secondary volume.

Page 137: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 113

• Cross-Switch PointThe cross-switch point determines the point at which cross-switchingwill occur when key position or velocity is controlling cross-switch.

XSWITCH POINT064 (E3)

• Primary Filter TypeThis screen allows you to select one of 197 Z-Plane filter types availablein ROM. These filters include: traditional low-pass filters, flanger simu-lators, vowel formants, distortion filters, acoustic instrument modelsand many, many more. See the reference section for a complete listingand descriptions of the filters.

FILTER TYPE priF035 Ee-Yi.4

• Secondary Filter TypeThis screen allows you to set the filter type for the secondary layer. SeePrimary Filter Type.

FILTER TYPE secF139 MidFeedBk2

• Filter LevelThis function sets the amount of signal into the filter. This control canbe used to balance the levels between instruments or to control thedistortion characteristics of the filter. Depending on the type of instru-ment and the filter, this control can have a dramatic effect on thesound. This control differs from the Volume parameter which adjuststhe volume after the filter. The default setting is 255 (full level).

FILTER LEVELpri:198 sec:255

Velocity Key

To enable the Cross-switchfunction, you must assignCrossfade to a modulationsource in the Note-on orRealtime Cords screens.

PRESET MENU

Under certain unusualcircumstances the filters mayoverload, producing a loudobjectionable noise. Turndown the Filter Level value toalleviate the problem.

Page 138: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual114

PRESET MENU

• Morph OffsetThis function allows you to set the initial point in the filter morph withno modulation applied. Subsequent modulation will be added or sub-tracted to this value.

MORPH OFFSETpri:096 sec:000

The Morph Offset sets the point along the morph axis where the filter starts with nomodulation applied.

• Filter Frequency TrackingIf the filter frequency remains constant as the pitch of a sound is varied,the timbre of the sound will change with pitch. A way to correct this isto have the filter's frequency track the pitch of the note. This func-tion sets the initial frequency of the filter's pitch tracking. Ingeneral, you can think of frequency tracking as a tone control. In orderto have keyboard tracking, you must also patch the “Keyboard to FilterFrequency Tracking” in the Note-On modulation screen.

FILT FREQ TRACKpri:000 sec:000

••• In many of the filters,the Filter FrequencyTracking works like a tonecontrol which brightens ordarkens the sound.

Frequency

Am

pli

tud

e

Morph

A Filter

B Filter

Morph

Page 139: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 115

PRESET MENU

Filter Frequency Tracking allows the timbre of the sound to remain constant up anddown the keyboard (if Key Number is routed to this parameter).

Key Number

Morph(Envelope, Wheel,LFO, etc.)

Filter Frequency Tracking

Frequency

Each Morpheus filter is actually constructed of up to eight different complex filters.

• Filter Transform 2Suppose we added yet another dimension to the filter model. We havethe realtime Morph parameter, the Frequency Tracking parameter (set atnote-on time) and one more parameter, perhaps controlling theamount of the filter peaks with key velocity. A way to visualize a three-dimensional filter model is shown in the diagram below.

Key Number

Frequency Tracking

Tran

sfor

m 2

Vel

oci

ty

Mor

ph

Mor

ph

Tran

sfor

m 2

Tran

sfor

m 2

Mor

ph

Tran

sfor

m 2

Real-T

ime

Mor

ph

Frequency Tracking

Frequency Tracking

Frequency Tracking

Page 140: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual116

Each axis of the three-dimensional cube changes the filter in a differentway. In the example above, key number is being applied to the Fre-quency Tracking parameter in order to make the filter frequency trackor follow the notes played on the keyboard.

In the 3-D filter model, there is another note-on (defined at the time thenote is pressed) parameter, Transform 2. Unlike the frequency trackingparameter, the effect of Transform 2 varies from filter to filter. In theexample above, Transform 2 is being used to vary the size of the peaksand notches in the filter. The frequency plots in the upper plane of thecube have sharper peaks. In the example above, key velocity is beingused to control Transform 2 and the sharpness of the filter peaks.

Filter Transform 2 sets the Initial Point along the Transform 2 axis.Subsequent modulation (from note-on modulation) adds to this initialsetting for the primary and secondary filters.

FILT TRANSFORM 2pri:000 sec:127

• Filter ReverseThis function allows you to reverse the direction of all of the filtercontrols. Key Tracking, Transform 2 and the Morph parameters will alloperate in reverse. The Offset points are reversed, as well as the direc-tion of filter modulation.

FILTER REVERSEpri:Off sec:Off

• Auxiliary EnvelopeThis is a supplementary, utility envelope that can be routed to anyrealtime control destination including the Morph filter. The auxiliaryenvelope parameters are: Envelope Amount, Delay, Attack Time, HoldTime, Decay Time, Sustain Level, and Release Time. The delay time isvariable from 0 to 13 seconds (000-127). The envelope amount is vari-able from -128 to +127. Negative values will produce invertedenvelopes.

AUX ENV AMT DLY A: A H D S R +127 000 00 00 00 99 20

PRESET MENU

••• For more information onthe Envelopes, see the PresetProgramming section of thismanual.

••• The filters labeled with“.4” in their name do not usethe Transform 2 parameter.

Page 141: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 117

• LFO 1 - Shape & AmountThis screen controls the waveshape and amount of Low FrequencyOscillator 1. The LFO can be used to produce vibrato (when routed topitch), or tremolo (when routed to volume). The LFO can be routed tocontrol any of the Realtime Modulation destinations (page 123). Thefive LFO waveshapes are: Triangle, Sine, Square, Sawtooth, and Ran-dom. The amount can be varied from -128 to +127. Negative values willproduce inverted waveshapes.

LFO1 SHAPE AMT Rand +127

• LFO 1 - Rate, Delay & VariationThis screen controls the rate, delay and variation of LFO 1.

LFO RateVaries the LFO speed from 0.052 Hz to 25 Hz (000-127).

LFO DelaySets the amount of time between hitting a key and the onset ofmodulation. This can be used to simulate an effect often used byacoustic instrument players, where the vibrato is brought in onlyafter the initial note pitch has been established. The delay range isvariable from 0 to 13 seconds (000-127).

LFO VariationSets the amount of random variation of an LFO each time a key ispressed. This function is useful for ensemble effects, where eachnote played has a slightly different modulation rate. The higherthe number, the greater the note to note variation in LFO rate.LFO variation is variable from 000-127.

LFO1 RT DLY VAR 000 000 000

PRESET MENU

••• For more information onthe LFOs, see the PresetProgramming section of thismanual.

Triangle

Square

Sine

Sawtooth

Random

Page 142: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual118

PRESET MENU

The Function Generator contains eight segments, each with a level and time param-eter.

L1

T1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8T2 T3

T4T5

T6 T7 T8

••• For more information onFunction Generators, see thePreset Programming sectionof this manual.

• LFO 2 - Shape & AmountLFO 2 is functionally identical to LFO 1.

• LFO 2 - Rate, Delay & VariationLFO 2 is functionally identical to LFO 1.

• Function Generators 1 and 2The Function Generators are eight segment modulation sources withconditional jumping capabilities and selectable segment shapes. Leveland Time parameters are provided for each stage. In addition, the shapeof each stage can be individually selected from a palette of 63 shapes.The function generator can be used when you want complex and pre-cise control over a parameter. Through the creative use of its condi-tional jumps and curves, the function generator can serve as a complexLFO, a complex envelope generator, a mini-sequencer, a random sourceor all at once if you desire.

FUNC GEN F1S1Level +124

Segment Number

Parameter Value/Shape

Function Generator 1 or 2

Level +127Time 0750msShape LinearCondJump NeverCondValue +000CondDestSeg 2

FunctionGeneratorParameters

••• Routing the FunctionGenerator to control Pitchmakes it easy to hear whatyou are doing.

Page 143: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 119

PRESET MENU

The function generator can have up to eight segments, each with a Leveland a Time parameter. The level parameter can be either positive ornegative. Each segment of the function generator can have a differentShape. There are 63 different shapes consisting of various curves,straight and crooked line segments, random, chaos and delays.

FUNC GEN F1S1Level +124

Fast Line 2

Circle 16 R

Chaos 6 Random K

Chaos

Linear

Expon

entia

lExp

+1

Four of the 63 curves are shown below. By combining the various curveshapes, extremely complex functions can be created. See the ReferenceSection of this manual for the complete set of function generator curvediagrams.

Function GeneratorCurvesLinearExponential +1Exponential +2Exponential +3Exponential +4Exponential +5Exponential +6Exponential +7Circle 1.4Circle 1.6Circle 1.8Circle 1.16SqueezeFast Line 1Fast Line 2Fast Line 3Medium Line 1Medium Line 2Slow Ramp 1Slow Ramp 2BloomBloom 2Circle 1.16 ReverseCircle 1.8 ReverseCircle 1.6 ReverseCircle 1.4 ReverseSlow Curve 1Slow Curve 2Delay DCDC DelayCurve 2xCurve 2x BCurve 2x CZiz Zag 1Ziz Zag 2Ziz Zag 3Chaos 03, 06, 12, 16, 25, 33,

37, 50, 66, 75, 95, 99Linear Shuffle 1Linear Shuffle 2Random A-LRandom Z

Page 144: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual120

PRESET MENU

The function generator can be programmed to jump between segmentsbased on certain conditions. Because the decision to jump is based onconditions, these jumps are called Conditional Jumps. For example, thefunction generator could be programmed to loop only if the key is stillbeing held. In the diagram below, the function generator has beenprogrammed to jump back to segment 3 if the key is held but jump tosegment 4 whenever the key is released.

1

2

3

4

If Note Off Jump to 4 at End of Segment

5 6 7 8If Note OffImmediately Jump to 4

If Note OnImmediately Jump to 3

Conditional jumps can be programmed to jump to the destinationsegment immediately or they can wait until the end of the segmentbefore jumping. The conditional jumps are:

Never .......................... Never jumps. Always goes on to next segment.

Always End .............. Always jumps at the end of the current segment.

Note On End ............. Jumps at the end of the segment if the note is stillon.

Note On Immed. ...... Jumps immediately if the note is still on.

Note Off End ............ Jumps at the end of the segment if the note is off.

Note Off Immed. ..... Jumps immediately if the note is off.

LFO 1 or 2 End ......... Jumps at the end of the segment if the value of theselected LFO is equal or greater than theconditional value.

Footsw. 1-3 End ....... Jumps at the end of the segment if the selectedfootswitch is pressed.

Footsw. 1-3 Immed. Jumps immediately if the selected footswitch ispressed.

Velocity End ............ Jumps at the end of the segment if the velocityvalue is greater than a positive conditional valueor less than a negative conditional value. See thefollowing page.

Key End ..................... Jumps at the end of the segment if the note valueis greater than a positive conditional value or lessthan a negative conditional value. See thefollowing page.

Remember to turn up theLFO amount when usingLFOs as conditionals.

••• A Conditional Jumpalways goes to the Begin-ning of the destinationsegment.

Page 145: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 121

PRESET MENU

For Velocity End & Key End

FUNC GEN F1S1CondValue +064

FUNC GEN F1S1CondValue -064

••• When one segment jumps to another at a different level, a smoothtransition is made between the two. The time to the end of the destina-tion segment remains as specified.

When the value is Negative, a jumpoccurs if the velocity or key numberis Less than value shown (ignoringthe sign).

When the value is Positive, a jumpoccurs if the velocity or key numberis Greater than value shown.

1

23

4

5

Time = .4 sec

Jump

Time = .4 sec

In the example above, segment 4 has been skipped, but the time to the end ofsegment 5 will remain the same (400 milliseconds). This will alter the slope ofsegment 5.• Function Generator AmountThis control scales the output of the function generator before it isapplied to a modulation destination (in the Realtime Control screen).The amount is like a water faucet. It controls “how much” of the func-tion generator is output. If a negative value is selected, the functiongenerator output will be inverted. Function generator 1 or 2 is selectedon the top line of the display (F1 or F2).

FUNC GEN AMT F1+064

••• Remember that you mustassign the function generatorto a destination in theRealtime Control screen.

••• The Function Genera-tor Amount can also bemodulated by a RealtimeControl source.

••• Drawing your functiongenerator ideas on paper firstwill simplify the program-ming process.

Page 146: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual122

PRESET MENU

• Note-On Modulation ControlThese functions allow you to route Note-On information (informationreceived at note-on time such as velocity or key number) to any of themodulation destinations. Up to 10 simultaneous paths or “patches”may be programmed. For each modulation patch, there is a source, adestination and a corresponding amount parameter which is variablefrom -128 to +127. Place the cursor under the appropriate parameterand change the patch number, modulation source, modulationdestination, or the amount, using the data entry control. If a param-eter is not labeled either primary or secondary, it affects both.

NOTE-ON CTRL #0V Volume +000

Note-OnModulation SourcesKey Number, Key VelocityInitial Pitch Wheel AmountInitial Controller A AmountInitial Controller B AmountInitial Controller C AmountInitial Controller D AmountInitial Mono Pressure AmountInitial FR Function Gen.Amount

DestinationsOffPitch, Primary PitchSecondary PitchVolume, Primary VolumeSecondary VolumeAttack, Primary AttackSecondary AttackDecay, Primary DecaySecondary DecayRelease, Primary ReleaseSecondary ReleaseCrossfadeLFO 1 Amount, LFO 1 RateLFO 2 Amount, LFO 2 RateAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleaseFunction Gen 1 AmountFunction Gen 2 AmountPortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter MorphSecondary Filter MorphPan, Primary PanSecondary PanSample StartPrimary Sample StartSecondary Sample StartTone, Primary ToneSecondary ToneFilter Level, Primary Filter LevelSecondary Filter Level,Filter Freq. Tracking,Primary Filter Freq. TrackingSecondary Filter Freq. TrackingFilter Transform 2Primary Filter Transform 2Secondary Filter Transform 2

LFO 1

Amount Rate

LFO 2

Amount Rate

R

LVolume

PanPrimary

InstrumentPitch

SampleStart

Tone

VELOCITY

VELOCITYCURVE

KEY NUMBER

KEYBOARDCENTER

Note-On Modulation Sources

X-Fade

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

R

LVolume

PanSecondaryInstrument

PitchSampleStart

Tone

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

PortamentoRate

DCA

DCA

Modulation Destinations

AuxiliaryDAHDSR

AmtAtk Dec Rel

CONTROLLERA-B-C-D

(INITIAL SETTING)

PRESSURE(INITIAL SETTING)

FR FUNCTIONGENERATOR(INITIAL SETTING)

PITCH WHEEL(INITIAL SETTING)

FunctionGenerator 1

AmountCond

FunctionGenerator 2

AmountCond

Z-PlaneFilter

T2TrkMorphAttn.

Z-PlaneFilter

T2TrkMorphAttn.

Page 147: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 123

PRESET MENU

• Realtime Modulation ControlThese functions allow you to route realtime controllers to any of themodulation destinations except Tone, Sample Start, Filter FrequencyTracking and Filter Transform 2. Up to 10 simultaneous patches may beprogrammed. For each modulation patch, there is a source and a desti-nation parameter. Place the cursor under the appropriate parameterand change the patch number, modulation source, modulationdestination, or the amount using the data entry control. If a param-eter is not labeled either primary or secondary, it affects both.

REALTIME CTL #0PWhl Off +127

When Modulating Enve-lope Attack, Decay orRelease Times:

Positive amounts of modula-tion increase the time.

Negative amounts of modu-lation decrease the time.

RealtimeModulation SourcesPitch WheelMIDI Control AMIDI Control BMIDI Control CMIDI Control DMono PressurePolyphonic PressureLFO 1, LFO 2Auxiliary EnvelopeFunction Generator 1Function Generator 2Free-Run Function Generator

DestinationsOffPitch, Primary PitchSecondary PitchVolume, Primary VolumeSecondary VolumeAttack, Primary AttackSecondary AttackDecay, Primary DecaySecondary DecayRelease, Primary ReleaseSecondary ReleaseCrossfadeLFO 1 Amount, LFO 1 RateLFO 2 Amount, LFO 2 RateAuxiliary Envelope AmountAuxiliary Envelope AttackAuxiliary Envelope DecayAuxiliary Envelope ReleaseFunction Gen 1 AmountFunction Gen 2 AmountPortamento RatePrimary Portamento RateSecondary Portamento RateFilter MorphPrimary Filter Morph,Secondary Filter MorphPan, Primary PanSecondary Pan

Realtime Modulation Sources

POLYPRESSURE

MONOPRESSURE

MIDICONTROLLER

A/B/C/DLFO 2

AUXILIARYENVELOPELFO 1PITCH WHEEL

AuxiliaryDAHDSR

AmtAtk Dec Rel

LFO 1

Amount Rate

LFO 2

Amount Rate

Modulation Destinations

R

LVolume

Pan

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

PrimaryInstrument

Pitch

ToneZ-Plane

Filter

X-Fade

R

LVolume

Pan

Atk Dec Rel

VolumeAHDSR

SecondaryInstrument

Pitch

ToneZ-Plane

Filter

Morph

Morph

PortamentoRate

DCA

DCA

FUNCTIONGENERATOR

FREE-RUNFUNCTION

GENERATOR

FunctionGenerator 1

Amt

FunctionGenerator 2

Amt

Page 148: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual124

PRESET MENU

• Footswitch ControlThis function allows you to route the 3 footswitch controllers (1, 2 or 3)to any of the footswitch destinations. The footswitches can be routed toswitch: Sustain (pri/sec/both), alternate volume envelope (pri/sec/both),alternate volume release (pri/sec/both), cross-switch between the pri-mary and secondary instruments or switch portamento Off or On (pri/sec/both).

FOOTSWITCH CTRL1 -> Sustain

• Pitch Bend RangeThis function allows you to specify the pitch wheel range for the cur-rent preset if pitch bend is not being globally controlled in the Mastermenu. Pitch bend range is only used when the pitch wheel is used tocontrol pitch.

PITCH BEND RANGE+- 12 semitones

• Pressure AmountThis function allows you to specify an overall amount parameter formono or poly keyboard pressure data (pre-patch cord). The pressureamount is variable from -128 to +127.

PRESSURE AMOUNT+127

• MIDI Controller AmountThis function allows you to specify an overall amount parameter (pre-patch cord) which variable from -128 to +127 for each of the MIDIcontrollers.

CONTROLLER AMT CONTROLLER AMTA:+127 B:+127 C:+127 D:+127

Pressure Amount andController A-B-C-D Amountare MASTER Controls whichaffect the amount of modula-tion which can beprogrammed in the RealtimeModulation section.

In order for the RealtimeModulation Control amountsfor these functions to have afull range of control, thePressure and Controller A-Damounts must be set to+127.

Page 149: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 125

PRESET MENU

• Velocity CurveIncoming velocity data can be modified by a velocity curve in order toprovide different types of dynamics in response to your playing or betteradapt to the MIDI controller. This function allows you to select one ofthe four velocity curves or leave the velocity data unaltered (Off). Inaddition, the velocity curve can be set to “Global”, which means thatthe global velocity curve (programmed in the Master menu) is used.

VELOCITY CURVEGlobal

Curve 3

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 1

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Curve 4

Curve 2

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100

Played Velocity120

Res

ult

Vel

oci

ty

Page 150: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual126

PRESET MENU

• Keyboard CenterThe Keyboard Center parameter establishes a reference point for key-board modulation. Keys above this point will have a positive value andkeys below it will be negative. The keyboard center can be set to any keywithin the range C-2 to G8.

KEYBOARD CENTERC#3

KEY CENTER

+

-

0

-

+

• Keyboard TuningIn addition to the standard equally divided octave tuning, Morpheuscontains four other types of scale tuning and one user-definable tuning.This function selects which tuning will be used in the current preset.

The choices of keyboard tunings are:

Equal tuning (12 tone equal temperament)Standard Western tuning.

Just C tuning (just intonation)Based on small interval ratios. Sweet and pure, non-beatingintervals.

Vallotti tuning (Vallotti & Young non-equal temperament)Similar to 12 tone equal temperament. For a given scale, each keyhas a different character.

19 Tone tuning (19 tone equal temperament)19 notes per octave. Difficult to play, but works well with a se-quencer.

Gamelan (Javanese) tuning (5 tone Slendro and 7 tone Pelog)Pelog-white keys, Slendro-black keys. Exotic tunings of Gamelanflavor.

User tuningDefined in the Master menu.

Page 151: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 8: Preset Menu 127

PRESET MENU

• Mix SelectThis function allows you to direct a particular preset to one of the fourdestinations (Main, Sub 1, FXA, FXB). This routing is utilized if MixSelect for a particular MIDI channel is set to “Preset” in the currentMidimap. Otherwise this setting is ignored. This function allows you tochoose the effect bus in the preset rather than by MIDI channel.

MIX OUTPUTMain

• Save PresetChanges made to a preset in the Preset Edit menu are not made perma-nent until the preset is Saved. To save a preset, move the cursor to thebottom line and select the location for the new preset with the dataentry control. The Enter LED will then flash. Pressing the Enter buttonwill confirm the operation.

Any user preset (000-127, bank 0) or RAM card location (000-127, bank3) may be selected using the data entry control. Writing to a user preseterases the existing preset in that location. Make sure that the destina-tion preset does not contain information that you want to keep.

SAVE PRESET to064 Preset Name

In order for the Preset MixSelect to be utilized, theMidimap Mix select must beset to “Preset”.

0

Page 152: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual128

Page 153: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 9: Copy Menu 129

COPY MENU

COPYMENU

Page 154: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual130

COPY MENU

Page 155: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 9: Copy Menu 131

COPY MENU

The Copy menu functions allow you to copy data between Presets,Hyperpresets or Midimaps. Selected groups of parameters, such asFunction Generator or Effects settings, can be simply copied, making iteasy to build new Presets, Hyperpresets or Midimaps.

• When using the Copy functions, you always copy INTO the Cur-rent “Scratch” Preset, Hyperpreset or Midimap. The copy menusallow you to copy data from anywhere in the machine.

To enable the Copy menuPress the Copy key, lighting the LED. The current screen will bethe one most recently selected since powering up the machine.The cursor will appear underneath the first character of the screenheading on line one.

To select a new screenPress the Home/Enter key or press the cursor keys repeatedly untilthe cursor is underneath the screen title heading. Rotate the dataentry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameterPress the cursor key repeatedly (or hold the right cursor key whileturning the data entry control) until the cursor is underneath theparameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change thevalue.

To return to the modulePress the Copy key, turning off the LED. You will be returned tothe main screen.

COPY MENU FUNCTIONS

• Copy PresetThis function allows you to copy a preset from any location inMorpheus into the current preset location. The current preset is thepreset showing in the main screen.

COPY PRESET000 Preset Name0

Remember to SAVE youredited Preset, Hyper presretor Midimap if you want tokeep it.

Page 156: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual132

COPY MENU

• Copy LayerThis function allows you to copy everything in the primary or second-ary layer (or both) from another preset into the current preset. Aprimary layer may be copied into the secondary layer and vice-versa.Only parameters which are designated “primary” or “secondary” willbe copied. Parameters such as the LFOs or modulation routings willNOT be copied.

There are five options available: Pri to Pri, Pri to Sec, Sec to Sec, Sec toPri, Pri & Sec (Both)

COPY LAYER P P000 Preset Name

• Copy FilterThis function allows you to copy the filter settings for the primary orsecondary layer (or both) from another preset into the current preset.

Copy Filter copies the following parameters only: Filter Type, FilterLevel, Morph Offset, Filter Frequency Track (initial setting), FilterTransform 2 (initial setting) and Filter Reverse.

There are five options available: Pri to Pri, Pri to Sec, Sec to Sec, Sec toPri, Pri & Sec (Both)

COPY FILTER P P000 Preset Name

• Copy LFOThis function allows you to copy the LFO settings for LFO1, LFO2 orboth from another preset into the current preset.

There are five options available: 1 to 1, 1 to 2, 2 to 2, 2 to 1, 1 & 2(Both).

COPY LFO 1 1000 Preset Name

••• Data copied from thesame preset will come fromthe saved version of thepreset, NOT the editedversion. This could be used asa “Revert” feature if youmake a mistake whileediting.

0

0

0

Page 157: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 9: Copy Menu 133

COPY MENU

• Copy Function GeneratorThis function allows you to copy the function generator parametersfor either FG1, FG2 or both from another preset into the currentpreset.

There are five options available: 1 to 1, 1 to 2, 2 to 2, 2 to 1, 1 & 2(Both).

COPY FUNCGEN 1 1000 Preset Name

• Copy Auxiliary EnvelopeThis function allows you to copy just the auxiliary envelope param-eters from another preset into the current preset. There is only a singleoption.

COPY AUX ENV000 PresetName

• Copy Note-On ControlThis function allows you to copy the Note-On modulation routingsfrom another preset into the current preset. There is only a singleoption.

COPY NOTE-ON CTL000 Preset Name

• Copy Realtime ControlThis function allows you to copy the Realtime modulation routingsfrom another preset into the current preset. There is only a singleoption.

COPY RLTIME CTL000 Preset Name

0

0

0

0

Page 158: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual134

COPY MENU

• Copy HyperpresetThis function allows you to copy a hyperpreset from any hyperpresetinto the current hyperpreset location.

COPY HYPERPRESET000 HyperName

• Copy ZoneThis function allows you to copy a single hyperpreset zone from anyhyperpreset into the current hyperpreset location. Zones may beplaced into any other zone number in the current hyperpreset.

COPY ZONE 01 03000 HyperName

• Copy Free-Run Function GeneratorThis function allows you to copy all the Free-Run Function Generatorparameters from any hyperpreset into the current hyperpreset loca-tion.

COPY FREE-RUN FG000 HyperName

• Copy MidimapThis function allows you to copy an entire midimap into the currentmidimap location.

COPY MIDIMAPM00 MidiName

•••The current hyperpreset isthe last one selected ormodified.

2

2

2

Page 159: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 9: Copy Menu 135

COPY MENU

• Copy ChannelThis function allows you to copy all the information from a singleMIDI channel from any midimap into the current midimap location.Channels may be placed into any other channel number in the cur-rent midimap. The parameters that will be copied are: Preset/Hyper,Volume, Pan, Mix, MIDI Enables, and Bank Select.

COPY CHAN 01 03M00 MidiName

• Copy EffectsThis function allows you to copy effects from any midimap into thecurrent midimap location. There are three options available: A to A, Bto B, A & B (Both). (Because of the differences between the A and B effects,it is not possible to copy between A and B.)

Copying a single A or B effect includes all effects parameters and the Aor B amount (but not the A->B amount). When both effects are cop-ied, the A->B amount is included.

COPY EFFECT A AM00 MidiName

• Copy Program Change MapThis function allows you to copy a single Program Change Map intoany other Program Change Map number. Program Change Maps arelocated in the Master menu.

COPY PRG CHG MAP#1 #3

Page 160: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual136

COPY MENU

• Copy BankThis function allows you to copy an entire bank of 128 programs or aset of 16 Midimaps between ROM, RAM and Card locations. “All”allows you to copy all RAM presets, Hyperpresets and Midimaps to thecard or vice-versa.

WARNINGBe careful when using the Copy Bank function. It is very easy to

accidentally overwrite an entire bank of data!

There are ten options available:Presets - RAM to Card, Card to RAM, ROM to RAM, ROM to Card,Hypers - RAM to Card, Card to RAM,MIDImap - RAM to Card, Card to RAM,All - Card to RAM, RAM to Card

COPY BANKPresets RAM Card

Page 161: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 137

STEP-BY-STEP

STEP-BY-STEP

Page 162: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual138

STEP-BY-STEP

Page 163: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 139

STEP-BY-STEP

This chapter walks you through Morpheus in a step-by-step manner.Although it is not possible to cover every detail of programming asynthesizer of this complexity, these first steps will hopefully get youstarted in the right direction. Before starting this chapter, please readthe Programming Basics chapter of this manual. It contains importantbackground information, which will help you get the most of thischapter.

• If you are new to synthesizers and electronic music, you may needmore background information than this manual provides. There aremany books dedicated to synthesizer basics and MIDI available throughyour local music dealer. Magazines such as Keyboard and ElectronicMusician, which are available at most newsstands, contain currentinformation on the subject, as well as valuable programming tips.

Morpheus (or any synthesizer for that matter) is not really one instru-ment but a collection of modules which can be connected together tocreate many different instruments. In programming a synthesizer, youbecome an instrument builder. The more knowledge you have aboutmusic, acoustics, and electronics, the more success you will have inconstructing the sounds of your dreams.

Learning about sound synthesis will be much easier if you learn to reallyLISTEN to the sounds all around you, then try to recreate them. Listento how the pitch rises on that bird's chirp, or how the volume changeson that organ. Soon you'll be hearing sounds in a whole new way. Ofcourse, imitating natural sounds is only a part of sound synthesis. Thereal fun happens when you create a wonderful new sound that no onehas ever heard before. Experimentation + Knowledge = MAGIC!

Programming Morpheus is like exploring new territory. No one beforeyou has EVER had access to this powerful technology. You have toexplore to find what's out there!

EDITING PRESETSA good way to get acquainted with Morpheus is by examining andediting existing presets. If you hear an effect or a control you like, takethe time to discover how it was achieved.

Start with a preset you like and try changing it around. If you don't likethe result, simply change the preset momentarily and you'll be back tothe original sound. Changes are not made permanent until you SAVE apreset. Therefore you can experiment all you want without worryingabout losing a sound.

Page 164: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual140

STEP-BY-STEP

STARTING FROM SCRATCHWhen starting from scratch, first select the Default Preset (-defPreset-)which is located in the factory location 127 (bank 1). A default is basi-cally a blank preset which is ready to program. After selecting the de-fault preset, press the Preset button.

• The InstrumentThe instrument is the basis of your sound. The instruments inMorpheus are digital recordings of various sounds from the simple (sinewave) to the complex (Bosendorfer Piano). The second screen in thePreset menu selects the primary instrument.

INSTRUMENT priI006 Vox Choir

Move the cursor down to the bottom line and change the primaryinstrument using the data entry control. You should be hearing theinstrument change as you scroll through the instruments. A patchdiagram (shown below) is useful to visualize the connection you havejust made. Press Enter when you find an instrument you like.

Turn the data knob one click to the right to the secondary instrument

select screen. The secondary instruments are identical to the primaryinstruments. Change the secondary instrument and listen to the variouscombinations of the two. What you are doing is actually a simple formof additive synthesis. You are adding two sounds together to form a newsound.

Blending two instruments together can create an ensemble effectif the instruments are different, or a thicker sound if both instru-ments are the same. Two instruments can “fuse” into one new soundif their harmonic content is similar or if harmonic changes such asvibrato (pitch variation) occur in both instruments simultaneously.

For the next experiment, set the primary instrument to “010 AcousticGuitar” and the secondary instrument to “034 Piano Bright”. PressEnter.

R

L

PanInstrument DCA

Page 165: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 141

STEP-BY-STEP

• VolumeTurn the data knob one click to the right to the Volume screen. Thisscreen adjusts the volumes of the two instruments. Refer to the blockdiagram on the previous page as you adjust the volume of the DCA.

VOLUMEpri:110 sec:100

As you adjust the volume of the two instruments relative to each other,notice how the quality of the sound changes. Whichever instrument isloudest is perceived as the sound of both. But there is a range where thetwo instruments seem to “fuse” into one unique entity, somewhat like aharpsichord. Careful mixing can result in many beautiful timbres.

• PanThe next screen, Pan adjusts the balance between the left and rightoutputs. Panning one instrument hard right (+7) and the other hard left(-7) is a good way to keep the identities of the instruments separate. Tryit and notice how the guitar and piano instruments are distinct andseparate. When you are finished, return the pan settings to “0” andpress Enter.

PANpri:+0 sec:+0

• TransposeMove the data knob ahead four clicks until you find the transposescreen. This function transposes the key of the primary or secondaryinstrument. Each number represents a semitone interval up or down (+or -). To transpose an instrument up an octave, move the cursor to thebottom line and set the number to +12. A setting of +7 would result in aperfect fifth. Try transposing the piano and guitar sounds. When youare finished, return the settings to “0” and press Enter.

TRANSPOSEpri:+12 sec:+00

Transposing an instrument out of its normal range will completelychange the character of the sound. Sine waves transposed down canadd a killer bottom end to an otherwise harmless bass sound.

••• Use the coarse tuningcontrol to change the tuningof multiple drum instruments.

Page 166: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual142

STEP-BY-STEP

• Coarse TuningThis function is related to transpose and in fact, the two work welltogether in the creation of new timbres. A little background: Transposeworks by shifting the keyboard assignment of the samples (as if youwere sliding the keyboard up and down). Coarse Tuning keeps thekeyboard sample placement constant and actually tunes the samplesup. With multisampled instruments such as a piano, the timbre canchange dramatically using coarse tuning. (A multisampled sound is onethat contains multiple samples placed at various points on the keyboard.)

To hear this effect, first Coarse Tune the guitar up one octave (+12),then Transpose it down one octave (-12). The pitch remains the same,but what a difference in the tone! (You may want to turn the Pianoinstrument Off to make it easier to hear the guitar.)

PITCH TUNE crsepri:+12 sec:+00

• Fine TuningThe Fine Tune control is related to the coarse tuning, but has a range ofone semitone. When both primary and secondary instruments are thesame, detuning one of the instruments slightly will create a “fat” sounduseful for strings or ensemble effects.

PITCH TUNE finepri:+00 sec:+00

In preparation for the next experiment, let's clean the slate. Since wehaven't SAVED the preset yet, any changes you made will be lost assoon as you change the preset. Do that now. Simply press the Preset Editbutton extinguishing the LED, dial momentarily to another preset andthen go back to the ‘-defPreset-’. Now everything is erased. Set theprimaryinstrument to I005 Spectrum Pad, press Home/Enter, then slowly turnthe data entry knob until you find the screen shown below.

ALT VOL ENVELOPEpri:Off sec:Off

••• To hear how Transposeand Coarse Tuning differ, trythem on the multi-percussioninstruments.

••• Use Coarse Tuning totune multi-instrumentpercussion instruments.

Page 167: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 143

STEP-BY-STEP

• Alternate Volume EnvelopeTurn the Alternate Volume Envelope On for the primary instrument.This enables the next screen, the primary volume envelope.

P: A H D S R 00 00 50 99 15

Going back to the block diagram model, the preset now looks like this:

Every sound you hear, be it a piano note, a drum, a bell or whatever, has

R

L

PanSpectrum

PadDCA

AlternateVolume

Envelope

Percussion

Piano

Organ

Strings

••• The generalized envelopeshapes of a few types ofsounds are shown above.

a characteristic volume curve or Envelope which grows louder and softerin various ways during the course of the sound. The volume envelope ofa sound is one of the clues that our brain uses to determine what type ofsound is being produced.

Every instrument in Morpheus has its own volume envelope which isused when the Alternate Envelope parameter is turned Off. By turningthe Alternate Volume Envelope On, we can re-shape the instrument'snatural volume envelope any way we want. By re-shaping the volumeenvelope, you can dramatically change the way the sound is perceived.For example, by adjusting the envelope parameters you can make“bowed” pianos or backwards gongs. The diagrams at right show thevolume envelopes of a few common sounds.

Set all the numbers to 00 and listen to the sound. You should only heara little blip. Now move the cursor under the Attack Time (A) and slowlyincrease the value while playing the keyboard. The attack controls theamount of time it takes for the sound to reach full volume when a key ispressed and held.

Set the attack to “00” and slowly increase the Decay (D) instead. Noticehow percussion-like the sound becomes. You have just created thepercussion envelope shown at the right.

Set the Sustain (S) to 99 and slowly increase the Release time. Note theeffect as you release the note. The release time controls the time it takesfor the sound to die away when a note is released.

Page 168: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual144

STEP-BY-STEP

Practice making different volume envelopes. As you hear everydaysounds, try to imagine what the volume envelope of these soundsmight look like.

• Anatomy of an EnvelopeWhen a key is pressed, the envelope generator level starts to increase atthe Attack rate. When it reaches full level, it Holds at that level for thespecified Hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the envelopebegins to Decay back down at the Decay rate until it reaches the Sus-tain Level. (Note that all the other parameters are Rates, but the Sustainis a Level.) The envelope will stay at the Sustain level for as long as thekey is held. When the key is Released, the envelope falls back down tozero at the Release rate.

The secondary alternate volume envelope parameters perform the samefunctions on the secondary layer.

Delay

level

time

keydown

Attack

Hold

Decay

Sustain

Releasekey

released

• Double + DetuneThe next screen, Double + Detune, doubles the instrument and detunesit slightly by an adjustable amount. This acts like a chorus effect andserves to “fatten” the sound. Try it and notice how much fuller thesound becomes. Because this function works by using two instrumentsper layer, it halves the number of available notes that can be played.Therefore you should only use this feature when necessary to achievethe desired effect.

DOUBLE + DETUNEpri:06 sec:Off

••• For more informationabout Envelopes, see theProgramming Basics chapterin this manual.

••• The Delay parameter isonly available in the AuxiliaryEnvelope.

Page 169: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 145

STEP-BY-STEP

• Sound DelayThis function delays the onset of the note after a key is pressed and ismainly used when a secondary instrument is also present. Go ahead andselect a secondary instrument now, then come back to this screen toexperiment with the delay. A very small amount of delay can serve togive each layer its own sonic “identity”.

SOUND DELAYpri:000 sec:000

• Applications include:Echo Effect - Bring in a slightly softer version of the same instru-ment or even a different instrument. Who says you have to havenormal echoes?

Delayed Chorus - Set primary and secondary to the same instru-ment. Use Double + Delay, Fine Tuning and Sound Delay on thesecondary layer.

Sound Splicing - Splice the attack of one sound with the body ofanother using Sound Delay and Sound Start (the next subject ofour investigations). Read on.

• Sound StartSound Start removes the beginning (attack) of the sound as the value isincreased. It's probably time to clean the slate again. Change the presetmomentarily then return to the default preset (-defPreset-). Set theprimary instrument to: I033 Bright Electric Piano. Now flip back to theSound Start screen.

SOUND STARTpri:000 sec:000

As you slowly increase the Sound Start, notice how the percussive attackof the piano disappears. The sound becomes muted.

Page 170: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual146

STEP-BY-STEP

• Application - Sound SplicingSound Splicing is an operation that uses most of the features we've goneover. As mentioned above, Sound Splicing merges the attack of onesound with the body of another to form a new sound. The process isillustrated below.

The alternate volume envelopes are used to fade one instrument outwhile another fades in. Morpheus also contains many digitally gener-ated waveforms that may be combined with sampled instruments tochange the character of the sound, perhaps to add a digital “edge” oradd bass. The Sound Delay, Sound Start, Volume and the Transposeparameters allow you to refine the splice point between the primary andsecondary instruments.

As an example, let's splice a Piano and an Acoustic Guitar to create asort of “Piatar”. Start with the default preset again, and change only theparameters listed below. The piano instrument is shaped by the Alter-nate Volume Envelope so that only the percussive attack is heard (ashort delay and decay with the sustain set to zero).

The Acoustic Guitar 3 instrument serves as the body of the sound. TheSound Delay parameter is used to delay the onset of the guitar until thepiano attack has finished, The guitar attack is removed using the SoundStart parameter. The Attack parameter of the Secondary Alternate Enve-lope is set to 04 so the guitar will smoothly fade in as the piano fadesout. The guitar has also been transposed up an octave so that thepitches of the two instruments match. Finally, the volumes of the twoinstruments are balanced with the volume control.

Splicing is only of the many things you can do with Morpheus. Think ofMorpheus as an audio construction set, which allows you to mold thesound as you would a piece of clay. The instruments are like your rawmaterial and the other parameters are the sculpting tools.

Instrument: 012 AcoustcGtr3

Volume: 127

Transpose: +12

Alt Envelope: On

A H D S R

04 00 55 00 24

Sound Delay: 001

Sound Start: 033

Instrument: 033 BrightElPno

Volume: 082

Transpose: +00

Alt Envelope: On

A H D S R

00 04 12 00 00

Sound Delay: 000

Sound Start: 000

Primary Secondary

Page 171: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 147

STEP-BY-STEP

• Time to Save?If you wanted to keep this sound, you would have to SAVE it using theSave Preset function (the very last screen in the Preset menu). To save apreset, simply move the cursor to the bottom line of the display, selectthe preset location where you want to store it, then press Enter. That'sit!

Warning: Saving a preset erases whatever preset was already stored inthat location.

If you want to re-name your preset, do so using the first screen (PresetName), then save the preset again to the same location.

• LFO ModulationLet's investigate how modulation routings can affect the sound. Forthese experiments, you use the default preset. If you just wrote over it,there is another one stored in permanent ROM (127, bank 1). Select anyprimary instrument, but leave the secondary instrument turned Off.

The LFOs (Low Frequency Oscillators) generate repeating waves whichare commonly used to animate the sound or create vibrato (a cyclicpitch change). To create vibrato we can use an LFO to modulate thepitch. As you learned in the Programming Basics section, Modulationrequires a modulation Source and a Destination. The LFO is the sourceand Pitch is the destination. The block diagram below illustrates thisconnection.

••• You can think of eachmodulation patch as a“Cord”. You must connectBOTH ends of a cord for it towork.

To make the connection between the LFO and the Instrument Pitch,move through the Preset parameters until you find the screen shownbelow.

REALTIME CTRL #0PWhl Pitch +127

The setting shown indicates that the Pitch Wheel is connected to thePitch, with an amount of +127 (full). Press the right cursor button (>)twice to place the cursor under the modulation source. As you slowly

R

L

PanInstrument DCA

LFO 1

Pitch

Source

Patch Number

ModulationAmount

Destination

Page 172: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual148

STEP-BY-STEP

turn the data knob, each possible modulation source is displayed. SelectLFO 1 as the Source and press Home/Enter.

Turn the data entry knob counter-clockwise until you find the LFO 1parameter screens shown below.

LFO1 SHAPE AMT LFO1 RT DLY VAR Tri +000 060 000 000

Place the cursor under the Amount (AMT) parameter and set the valueto +127 (you have to re-key, to hear any changes). You should be hear-ing lots of vibrato. Adjust the other parameters such as Rate and Shape.Controlling pitch is an easy way to hear the different LFO waveshapes.Delay (DLY) sets a time before the LFO starts. Variation (VAR) makes therate of each LFO a little different for ensemble effects.

Now set the LFO Rate to about 20 and set the shape to “Saw”. Listen

how the sawtooth wave smoothly ramps up then comes abruptly down.Change the amount to -128 and notice that it now ramps down andcomes abruptly back up. Anytime you use a negative amount (in anypart of Morpheus), you Invert the modulation.

Inverted Sawtooth

Negative Amount

+-

Sawtooth

Triangle

Square

Sine

Sawtooth

Random

In preparation for the next experiment, set the LFO waveform to “Sine”and the rate to about “050”. Leave the amount set to “-128”. PressEnter.

••• LFO 2 is identical to LFO1.

Page 173: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 149

STEP-BY-STEP

Go back to the Realtime Modulation screen and set it as shown below.

REALTIME CTRL #0Lfo1 Pan +127

Notice how the LFO now moves the sound from side to side. The dia-gram below illustrates the connection you just made.

The Realtime Control screen connects ANY realtime modulationsource to ANY realtime control destination! The amount parametercontrols “how much” modulation is applied. Change the destination toVolume and listen. The block diagram for this connection is shownbelow.

Place the cursor under the “#0” on the top line of the display. Turn thedata entry knob and notice that the lower line changes with the patchnumber. There are TEN (count 'em) realtime modulation patches avail-able per preset! This is what sound synthesis is all about. By simulta-neously controlling many parameters, the sound is shaped in complexways into the desired form.

Now that you understand how to connect modulation sources todestinations, try using the Auxiliary Envelope Generator to controlpitch. You've already used the Alternate Volume Envelope generators.The Auxiliary Envelope works exactly the same, except that it has aninitial Delay stage and it can be routed to any realtime controldestination.

R

L

PanInstrument DCA

LFO 1

R

L

PanInstrument DCA

LFO 1

Vol••• An LFO modulatingvolume is called “Tremolo”.Tremolo is useful for organ,voice, surf guitars, etc.

••• You can think of eachmodulation patch as a“Cord”. You must connectBOTH ends of a cord for it towork.

Page 174: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual150

STEP-BY-STEP

• Modulating ModulatorsGo back again to the LFO 1 screen and turn the amount to “+000”. Nextturn to the Note-On Control screen and set up the screen to look likethe one below.

NOTE-ON CTRL #0Vel Lfo1Amt +080

The connection you just made is shown below.

Play the keyboard hard and then softly. The key velocity is controllingthe amount of LFO applied to the volume. The harder you play, themore LFO modulation is applied. The modulation wheel (RealtimeControl screen) can also be routed to control the LFO 1 amount, or theLFO rate or the Pan position, or all of the above. There can be ten Note-On modulations and ten Realtime modulations in each preset.

You can probably see why patch diagrams are important (even if theyonly exist in your mind). They allow you to visualize how theconnections are being made inside Morpheus.

R

L

PanInstrument DCA

LFO 1KeyVelocity

Volume

Amount

+-

Page 175: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 151

STEP-BY-STEP

• The Morpheus FilterThis is what a lot of you have been waiting for. This incredible filter iswhat puts the Morph in Morpheus. If you have not read the section on theZ-Plane Filter in the Preset Programming section, please do so before proceed-ing, since it contains important background information. Now we can addthe Z-Plane filter to our block diagram.

The filter has an input level control called the Filter Level which controlshow much signal is presented to the filter. This control (like most of thecontrols in Morpheus) has an initial amount and can also be controlledfrom a Note-on modulation source. Certain Morpheus filters are de-signed to distort the signal as a musical effect. The Filter Level allowsyou to control the amount of distortion produced by these special filtertypes.

The action of the Morph Offset varies from filter to filter. Because it canbe continuously varied, it can be thought of as the main filter control.See the section on Morpheus Filters in the Reference Section of thismanual for specific information on each filter.

The Frequency Tracking control changes the frequency of the filter onmany of the filter types. This would correspond to Fc or the cutofffrequency of a traditional lowpass filter, You can connect the keyboardto this control (in the Note-on Control screen) with an amount settingof “64” if you want the filter frequency to track the keyboard.

Let's examine the filter controls more closely. The vertical arrows in thediagram below, indicate controls that can be modulated. The MorphOffset is the only filter control that can be modulated continuously by aRealtime Control source.

R

LVolume

Pan

VolumeAHDSR

Instrument

PitchSampleStart

ToneZ-Plane Filter

DCA

Aux.DAHDSR

Velocity

MorphFreqTrk

FunctionGen. Possible

ModulationSources

Trans2

KeyPosition

FilterLevel

MorphOffset

Freq.Track

Transform2

Reverse

Filter Type

••• Frequency Tracking doesnot always control frequencyas the name would imply.See the Z-Plane Filter De-scriptions in the ReferenceSection for details on eachfilter type.

Page 176: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual152

STEP-BY-STEP

Key tracking is used to keep the timbre of the sound constant as youplay up and down the keyboard. Of course, you can route any Note-Oncontroller to control Frequency Tracking.

Like the Morph control, the effect of Transform 2 varies from filter tofilter and in many cases it is not used at all. On a simple lowpass filter,Transform 2 might be used as a Q (or resonance) control. On a flanger,it might control the depth of the notches. The Z-plane filter descrip-tions in the Reference Section give specific information on the functionof Transform 2 in each filter.

Just Do It!OK. Let's start experimenting with the filters. First, we should connectthe modulation wheel to control Morph so that it will be easy to hearthe effect of this important parameter. Start with a clean slate by select-ing the default preset again. Enter the Preset menu and select an instru-ment rich in harmonics such as “I004 PunchyBrass”.

The mod wheel is usually transmitted on MIDI controller 01. MorpheusController A is set to controller 01 by default. So if you have notchanged this parameter in the Master menu, Controller A is the modwheel. We want to route Controller A (the mod wheel) to Morph. Go tothe Realtime Modulation Control screen and set it as shown below.

REALTIME CTRL #1CtlA Morph +127

Note: A good way to verify that the mod wheel is connected is to set thedestination (in the screen above) to “Pitch” instead of “Morph”. Movethe wheel to verify that the pitch varies with the wheel. If so, change thedestination back to “Morph”.

Move to the “Primary Filter Type” screen and scroll though the variousfilters as you play the keyboard. Move the modulation wheel and verifythat the wheel is controlling the morph parameter. For this experiment,set the filter type to “F029 Vocal Cube”. This is an interesting filter andsince it is a “cube”, it has three parameters to adjust.

FILTER TYPE priF029 Vocal Cube

Many of the Z-plane filtersdo not use Transform 2.

••• Note: Filter FrequencyTracking is Transform 1.

••• Information on connect-ing MIDI controllers can befound at the end of theProgramming Basics section.

Page 177: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 153

STEP-BY-STEP

Move to the “Filter Frequency Tracking” screen and adjust the primaryoffset while playing the keyboard. (You must re-key the keyboard tohear the results of changing this value.) As specified, this parameterchanges the frequency of the filter, making it brighter as the value isincreased. Feel free to adjust the morph parameter as you adjust fre-quency tracking.

FILT FREQ TRACKpri:127 sec:000

Next we'll adjust “Filter Transform 2”. On this filter, Transform 2 in-creases the size of the peaks in the vocal formant. The effect of increas-ing the peaks is a pronounced “nasal” quality which is quite dramatic.

FILT TRANSFORM 2pri:127 sec:000

Now that you've explored the three main filter parameters, let's go backand connect the keyboard to “Filter Frequency Tracking”. The keyboardis a Note-On control. A setting of “064” is the proper setting for accuratekey tracking where the timbre will remain more or less constant up anddown the keyboard.

NOTE-ON CTRL #0Key FrqTrk +064

As long as we're programming Note-On Controls, go ahead and connectVelocity to Transform 2. The screen is shown below.

NOTE-ON CTRL #1Vel Trans2 +127

The timbre of the sound should now change as the keyboard is playedhard and soft. Transform 2, Frequency Tracking, and the Morph are allhighly interactive, so a fair amount of adjustment may be required toget the sound just right.

••• Feel free to change theinstrument at any timeduring these experiments.They are just that, Experi-ments!

Page 178: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual154

STEP-BY-STEP

• Filter FilosophyThe Instrument and the Filter work together to determine the harmoniccontent of the final sound. You can think of the instrument like claywhich is being squeezed through a die, the filter. The filter tries toimpress its structure on the harmonics of the instrument.

Frequency Response ofInstrument

Instrument'sResponse

Shaped byFilter

Filter

Of course, the filter cannot amplify or attenuate frequencies which donot exist in the original instrument. The Filter Frequency Trackingcontrol can be used to “tune in” the filter to match the instrument.

The Filter can only act on frequencies that are present in the Instrument. Use the FilterFrequency Tracking control to “fine tune” the filter to the instrument. No soundwould be output from the example above because the filter's frequency response andthe harmonic spectrum of the instrument do not coincide.

20

40

60

80

100

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Frequency

InstrumentSpectrum

FilterResponse

...

Am

pli

tud

e

Page 179: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 155

STEP-BY-STEP

The Filter imposes its response on the harmonic spectrum of the Instrument.

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Frequency

OriginalInstrumentSpectrum

Am

pli

tud

e

Frequency

FilterResponse

InstrumentThrough

Filter

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Am

pli

tud

e

Frequency

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880

Am

pli

tud

e

ResultingFrequency Spectrum

Page 180: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual156

STEP-BY-STEP

To illustrate the point, let's create a complete sound from scratch as anexample of how the various parameters combined with the Z-planefilter can radically alter an instrument. In this case we'll try running asaxophone through a clarinet and oboe filter using only the primarylayer. As in previous experiments, start with the default preset andchange only the parameters listed.

Instrument: 014 Tenor Sax 1

Alt Envelope: On

A H D S R

00 00 00 99 03

Double + Detune: 4

Filter Type: 085 Clr>Oboe

Morph Offset: 000

Sax-Obonet (pri only)Note-On Ctrl

0 Key -> Freq. Trk +064

1 Vel -> Trans2 +080

2 Vel -> ToneP -100

3 Vel -> VolumeP +049

Realtime Ctrl

1 Ctl A -> Morph +127

The Tenor Saxophone is an instrument rich in harmonics, making itideal for filtering. Double + Detune has been turned on to make the saxsound a little “fatter”, and the Alternate Volume Envelope has beenadjusted slightly for a fast attack and release. The filter type is 085Clarinet->Oboe, which models the resonance characteristics of a clari-net and morphs into the resonance of an oboe. On this particular filter,Transform 2 controls a lowpass filter and increases the volume slightly(more T2 equals brighter and louder). The Morph Offset is turned downto 000 so that it can be turned back up using Controller A (which de-faults to the Mod Wheel of your keyboard.). Control A has been routedto control the filter Morph in the Realtime Modulation Control.

Now to the Note-On modulation. The Key Number has been routed toKey Tracking with the standard setting of +064. This keeps the toneconstant as you play up and down the keyboard. Velocity has beenrouted to Transform 2, which will make the sound brighter and louderas you play harder. Velocity controls the Tone using negative modula-tion to slightly mute the sound with soft playing and controls volumeto increase the volume with hard playing.

This is just a simple example to get you started. To learn more abouthow great presets are constructed, examine the factory presets in detailand discover their secrets. Interesting and expressive sounds have manydifferent controls occurring simultaneously. In creating a preset, you areactually designing a new musical instrument. Take the time to fine tuneand polish your creation!

Page 181: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 157

STEP-BY-STEP

• MorphologyThe best and ultimately the only way to choose filters is to try them out.Morpheus is no mere mortal synthesizer with a single filter. Morpheushas 197 filter types to choose from. Think of the filters as you do instru-ments: entities which have a particular sound. As you learn what theinstrument and the filters sound like, you can mix and match them tosuit your needs.

• A flanger filter (which is a parametric EQ with closely-spacednotches) sounds like a traditional flanger when swept. If the fre-quency of the flanger is controlled by key velocity and not swept,the flanger can simulate different plucks on a string or strikes on asurface such as a cymbal.

• The need for Keyboard Tracking is reduced when using a para-metric EQ since the high frequencies are preserved (unlike alowpass filter).

• Time-variant filter sweeps are good for traditional synthesizereffects such as resonant sweeps, flanges, phasing, stereo panning,vowels, etc. Time-invariant filters are useful for distortion, simulat-ing instrument resonances, plucked strings, cymbals strikes, etc.

• Correlate the DCA envelope to emphasize or minimize parallelfilter attack and release characteristics.

• Try using vibrato (LFO to pitch) with vocal filters for more realis-tic vocal simulations.

• Velocity and Key Number generally alter the timbre in expressivepresets. Also, Harder (faster) usually equals Brighter.

• Natural sounds tend to use low Q filters.

• Fixed Formant Filters:

- Can reduce the unwanted effect of pitch shifting the samples(munchkinization).

- Simulate instrument body resonances

- Simulate cymbal strikes, with variation in the stick position

- Simulate woodwind instrument resonance

- Simulate guitar and string plucks with variation in pick position

• Swept Filters:

- Flanger

- Traditional Synthesizer Lowpass Filter Effects

Page 182: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual158

STEP-BY-STEP

USING MORPHEUS WITH A SEQUENCERWe thought you’d never ask. Morpheus was designed from its concep-tion with multi-timbral sequencing in mind. Just take a look at themain screen.

C01 VOL127 PAN=P000 Program Name

The preset for each MIDI channel is selected from the main screen orfrom the Midimap menu which stores sixteen (32 with a RAM cardinstalled) complete 16-channel MIDI setups. The Main Screen settingsare the same settings in the currently selected Midimap and anychanges you make will be reflected in either screen. Press the cursorbutton to move the cursor up so that it is underneath the channelnumber.

C01 VOL127 PAN=P000 Program Name

Turn the data entry control and you will see that every MIDI channelhas a preset assigned to it. Just select a preset or hyperpreset for each ofthe MIDI channels. It’s simple! If you want to store the sixteen channelMIDI setup, press the Midimap button and turn the data entry controlto the last screen, “Save Midimap to”. Then select a location and pressEnter.

In order to respond to multiple MIDI channels, Morpheus must be inMulti-Mode. Multi-Mode is selected in the Master menu. Press theMaster menu button and use the data entry control to scroll throughthe screens until you find MIDI MODE.

MIDI MODE IDMulti 00

Move the cursor down to the second line and change the mode toMulti as shown. Morpheus will now respond to multiple MIDIchannels.

Page 183: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 10: Step-by-Step 159

STEP-BY-STEP

MORE ADVANCED SEQUENCING• Pre-Sequence SetupSuppose that you want to have your sequencer set up everything foryou before the start of the song. Good idea. This will make theMorpheus setup procedure automatic and prevent the wrong presetsfrom playing.

The basic idea of a pre-sequence setup is to send out a Midimap Selectcommand just before the start of the song. Your pre-programmedMidimap will select all the proper presets, adjust the mix and effectssettings as well as the pan positions of each preset.

Most computer-based MIDI sequencers have the ability to send MIDISysEx data. The ONLY way to select a Midimap remotely is to use aSysEx message. Consult your sequencer operation manual for informa-tion on sending SysEx messages.

Note: Morpheus setup information should be transmitted from thesequencer before the song actually starts, perhaps during a lead-in meas-ure or countdown. DO NOT send setup information just before the firstbeat of the song or MIDI timing errors could result.

• Initial Setup1) Program a Midimap exactly the way you want it, with Channels to

Preset/Hyper, MIDI Enables and Effect Settings. Be sure to nameyour Midimap so you can recognize it later.

2) SAVE the Midimap in one of the sixteen internal locations or oneof the sixteen RAM card locations.

3) Make sure the Device ID (MIDI Mode in the Master menu) is set to00. Otherwise Morpheus will simply ignore the SysEx messages.

• Before the Sequence StartsSend the following MIDI SysEx messages exactly as listed.

1) Turn On Multi-Mode - Send: F0 18 0C 00 03 08 02 02 00 F7

2) Select the Midimap - Send: F0 18 0C 00 03 40 02 02 00 F7

Use the chart at right to find the proper “Hex” number (in Bold) toinsert into the MIDI string. For example, to select Midimap 10, youwould insert the hexadecimal number “0A” in the position shownabove.

Now your song will play perfectly every time according to the param-eters in the Midimap. In addition, programs, volumes and pan positions(or anything else for that matter) can be adjusted in realtime during thesong using standard MIDI controllers. Note: If the wrong programs arebeing selected, check the MIDI Program Change Map.

Midimap NumberMap Hx

00 = 0001 = 0102 = 0203 = 0304 = 0405 = 0506 = 0607 = 0708 = 0809 = 09

21 = 1522 = 1623 = 1724 = 1825 = 1926 = 1A27 = 1B28 = 1C29 = 1D30 = 1E31 = 1F

10 = 0A11 = 0B12 = 0C13 = 0D14 = 0E15 = 0F16 = 1017 = 1118 = 1219 = 1320 = 14

••• To Change ProgramBanks via MIDI SysEx, send:

Bn 00 00 20 ll Cn pp

n = MIDI chan. number (0-F)

ll = Bank number (00-04)

pp = Preset in the new bank(00-7F)

••• Note: Device ID 00 is onlynecessary for the exampleshown below. Device IDs areused to differentiate multipleMorpheus units on the MIDIcable.

Page 184: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual160

STEP-BY-STEP

• Using the 32 ChannelsAs stated earlier, Morpheus has 32 independent audio channels whichare utilized dynamically. With 32 channels and hundreds of sounds,you have a universe of sonic textures at your disposal. You may havenoticed that many of the very “big” sounding hyperpresets inMorpheus are constructed using layered presets or they may useDouble+Detune. While this is fine when the hyper is played solo, youmay begin to run out of channels when Morpheus is played multi-timbrally. Layered hyperpresets and the Double+Detune function causeextra output channels to be used. Learn to “budget” your output chan-nels for maximum efficiency.

• Channel RipoffWhen Morpheus uses up all its 32 channels and needs more, it steals achannel from the key that has been held the longest. This is commonlyknown as “channel rip-off”. You will most commonly encounter this“rip-off” when using Morpheus in multi-timbral mode or when usingmassive hyperpresets. Long Alternate Envelope attack and release ratescan also cause this problem. Since Morpheus dynamically allocateschannels as needed, you must either, play fewer notes, shorten therelease rates, use simpler sounds, or turn off Double+Detune to elimi-nate channel rip-off.

• Using External ProcessingDon't be afraid to use external processing on specific sounds if you feelthe urge. The submix sends and returns on Morpheus are there for areason. In certain instances, a little external signal processing will bejust the thing an instrument needs to give it a distinct identity. Inciden-tally, a real guitar or bassamp can work wonderson the guitar and basssounds. If you thinkabout it, playing thesesounds through aninstrument amp ismuch closer to theway they are nor-mally processed.Because the submixoutputs are pro-grammable, onlyselected presets orMIDI channels willbe routed to theguitar amp.

Using the programmable outputs and returns, specific presets can be routed throughoutboard processors without using up precious mixer channels.

R - SUB2 - L R - SUB1 - L R - MAIN - LMONO STEREO

OUTPUTS

Tip

Guitar Amp

R - SUB1 - L

RingTip RingTip

StereoEffect Unit

OR…

••• Use the effects section to“fatten” your sound insteadof the chorus feature in thepreset. This will help conserveprecious voice channels.

Page 185: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 161

REFERENCESECTION

Page 186: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual162

FACTORY RAM PRESETS - BANK 0

DRUM9. Sweep100. House101. Skritch102. Reversa103. Scratch104. My Kick105. Kicks106. Snares107. CymNoiz108. Congas109. Alien

SOUND FX110. Sonik Synth111. Noise Band112. Velimba113. S/H114. Hemlock115. Wormhole116. Manic Jig117. Da Radio118. Drumble119. Dipped Metal

TEKNO120. Omatika121. Oral Oscillate122. Java Tea123. Razor Slice124. Ravia Maj125. Bell Epic126. Krazy Rom

127. -defPreset-

LEAD6. Grunge70. Sync Lead71. Cheap Trick72. Pulse Lead73. Sinnleed74. Metal Growl75. Synthle76. Stoked Up77. Hooh Zayr78. Nyles Song79. Mallet

ATMOSPHERE7. Rave Gruv80. Astralix81. Nova Arp82. Mosaic83. Lunar Arp84. Heavens Gate85. Ferrous86. Koto Breath87. Vulkan Vowel88. Movie89. Flute Duo

VOCAL8. Why?90. Flange Vox91. Angel Heart92. Cirrus93. Uman String94. Erica’s95. Oz Boiz96. Vox Sweep97. Amazon98. Wow Man99. Window Pane

PAD3. Strings40. Synth River41. BrassKin42. Huge String43. Synth Morph44. Strang Thang45. Mechanik46. Leslike47. Weird B348. Flange String49. Eden Drone

BASS4. UpRight50. Bozo25051. Fat Sawz52. Selazap53. Bassa54. Grindge55. Q Fall56. Some57. Headcase58. Form59. Acous & Elect

GUITAR5. Trippy60. Santa Cruz61. New Dist.62. String Ring63. Expressive64. Wheel65. Guitarzan66. Thunder Tar67. Harmtoo68. Flang Strat69. Pick It

MORPH0. Z-Synth10. Klav Klipper11. Flute Too12. Air String13. Voices14. Whisper15. Rhythm Of Life16. Metal Mlt17. Phazbraz18. Rezz Slither19. SteinChoral

REAL1. Piano Vibe20. Piano21. E. Piano22. Steinway Bass23. Flute24. Mute Me25. Misty Vibe26. Expr Acou. Guitar27. String<Chorus28. Brass String29. Stein Tine

COMP2. Electric Piano30. Chik Willy31. 2 Pianos32. Ring Fire33. Tine Organ34. Syntaks35. Puck Muff36. Organic37. Vell Bell38. Cookin’39. Ear Candy

Page 187: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 163

FACTORY ROM PRESETS - BANK 1

MORPH0. Morpheus10. Phat Sky11. Swell Pad12. Windy Pip13. Organ/Bass14. Harpog15. Sethy Sax16. Sax Change17. Shoop Dee18. Picknal19. SynBrass

REAL1. PianoVibe20. Ambient Piano21. Z Piano22. UpRight23. Pick Eldora24. Mute Me25. String/Brass26. Pop Brass27. Vibes28. Double Bari29. Flute

COMP2. Electric Piano30. Yeaowaho31. Vox Organ32. PianoStik33. No Quarter34. Elekt Piano35. Hot Jazz36. Schnap37. Pad/Clav38. Snowfall39. Muf Horton

LEAD6. Flute Morph70. Jupiter Synth71. Big Hooter72. Barri Q73. Jazz Synth74. Talk Flute75. JX Touch76. Crunchy77. Whofs78. Reasonable79. Brute Emu

ATMOSPHERE7. Atmorphs80. Twit Pink81. Ethereal Air82. Ethereal Keys83. Synth84. Phobia85. Air Flange86. WaveMerge87. Fools Water88. Noise E!89. AirWaves

VOCAL8. Vocal Wheel90. Big Will91. Noise Vowl92. Yah Synth93. Yuppies94. Hissing95. Chorus Vowel96. Breathy Vowel97. Pulse98. Morfy Yes99. Vox Pad

DRUM9. Dance100. New Jacq101. Snare102. Lo<Drum103. Hi<Drum104. Morphie105. Notch106. Sweep107. Reverse108. Deep Power109. China

SOUND FX110. Computer String111. Bean Machine112. Bass Drum113. Snare Drum114. Shaker115. WhatYeah116. Jaw Mama117. Space Gum118. DidgDink119. Gruf Rumble

TEKNO120. LeadMeOn121. Woofer122. Blaster123. FX124. Poundage125. Shame126. Rave

127. -defPreset-

PAD3. Ball Heavies40. Swirly41. Centered42. Oasis43. Epic Moment44. Weird Beard45. Hough Finger46. Beauty47. Krone Wave48. String Swell49. FunkShun

BASS4. Sweep50. Noir51. Deep52. The Q53. Expanse54. Breath55. Thick56. Friend57. My Pulse58. SawBass59. Emu Mod

GUITAR5. Trippy60. Riphust61. Electric62. Mouth63. Acoustic64. Santa Cruz65. Harmonix66. Expressive Ac.67. Slip Pick68. Distort69. Fuzz Tone

Page 188: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual164

MORPHEUS INSTRUMENTS

SAMPLED SOUNDS1. Dance Drums 1 ........................

2. Dance Drums 2 ........................

3. Dancer Synth

4. Punchy Brass

5. Spectrum Pad

6. Vox Choir

7. Jupiter String

8. Orchestral String 1

9. Orchestral String 2

10. Acoustic Guitar

11. Acoustic Guitar 2

12. Acoustic Guitar 3

13. Silver Flute

14. Tenor Sax 1

15. Tenor Sax 2

16. Bari Sax

17. Soprano Sax

18. Alto Sax

19. Metal String

20. Gutt Bass

21. Upright Bass

22. Upright Bass 2

23. Fretless

24. Quick Bass

25. Cool Vibe

26. Bright Vibes

27. Vibe Stik

28. Crotales

29. Peking

30. Java Malet

31. Kenong

32. Icy Pad

33. Bright Electric Piano

34. Piano Bright

35. Piano Medium 1

36. Piano Medium 2

37. Piano Dark

38. Rock Organ

39. Clean Strat

40. Harmonics

41. Bass Harmonic

42. Electric Bass 1

43. Electric Bass 2

44. Electric Bass 3

45. Electric Bass 4

46. Electric Bass 5

47. Electric Bass 6

48. Electric Bass 7

STANDARD SYNTHESIZERWAVEFORMS49. Sawtooth

50. Square

51. Pulse 50%

52. Pulse 75%

53. Pulse 90%

54. Pulse 94%

55. Pulse 96%

56. Pulse 98%

57. Pulse 99%

58. Noise

59. Oct 3rd White Noise

60. Triangle

See the Percussion InstrumentLocation Diagrams on page 168.

Page 189: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 165

MORPHEUS INSTRUMENTS

HARMONIC WAVEFORMS61. Oct 1 (Sine)

62. Oct 2 All

63. Oct 3 All

64. Oct 4 All

65. Oct 5 All

66. Oct 6 All

67. Oct 7 All

68. Oct 2 Odd

69. Oct 3 Odd

70. Oct 4 Odd

71. Oct 5 Odd

72. Oct 6 Odd

73. Oct 7 Odd

74. Oct 2 Even

75. Oct 3 Even

76. Oct 4 Even

77. Oct 5 Even

78. Oct 6 Even

79. Oct 7 Even

80. Low Odds

81. Low Evens

82. Four Octaves

Starting from the first octave (fundamental),the harmonic waveforms contain the har-monics (odd, even, or all) present in eachoctave. In each successive octave, the numberofharmonics doubles. By combining (pri/sec orlink) the harmonic waveforms in variousamounts (volume), and transposing them(course/fine tuning), a wide range of timbresmay be produced.

As an example, this chart shows the harmonics present in the Octave 5 Odd wave-form.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 151617 3118

1 2 3 4 5

Harmonic

Octave

Frequency (log)

Leve

l

1719

2123

2527

2931

OCTAVE-5 ODD

Page 190: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual166

MORPHEUS INSTRUMENTS

SYNTHESIZER & ORGAN WAVEFORMSSingle cycle waveforms are sampled waves from various synthesizersand organs. Waveforms highlighted in Bold lettering are multicyclesamples. The ohers are single cycle waveforms. B3 waves are variousharmonic drawbar settings designed to be used alone or layered.

113. Organ Cycle 2

114. Violin Essence

115. Buzzoon

116. Brassy Wave

117. Woofer Pulse

118. Trumpet Waves 1

119. Trumpet Waves 2

120. Trumpet Waves 3

121. Reedy Buzz

122. Growl Wave

123. HarpsiWave

124. Fuzzy Gruzz

125. Power 5ths

126. Reson TG

127. Hollow Whisp

128. Metal Whisp

129. Formant Axe

130. Crunchy Lead

131. Sync Lead

132. Pulse Sweep

133. Pulse Wave

134. Emu Modular 1

135. Emu Modular 2

136. Mini MOOG

137. Saint Moog

138. Analog Bass

139. Liquid Moog

140. Quake Bass

141. Q Bass

142. Luxury Bass

83. B3 Wave 1

84. B3 Wave 2

85. B3 Wave 4

86. B3 Wave 5

87. B3 Wave 6

88. Organ Wave 1

89. Organ Wave 2

90. Barber Pole

91. Synth Cycle 1

92. Synth Cycle 2

93. Synth Cycle 3

94. Synth Cycle 4

95. Fundamental Gone 1

96. Fundamental Gone 2

97. Bite Cycle

98. Buzzy Cycle

99. Metalphone 1

100. Metalphone 2

101. Metalphone 3

102. Metalphone 4

103. Tine Wave

104. Duck Cycle 1

105. Duck Cycle 2

106. Duck Cycle 3

107. Theremin Saw

108. Wind Cycle 1

109. Wind Cycle 2

110. Wind Cycle 3

111. Wind Cycle 4

112. Organ Cycle 1

Page 191: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 167

MORPHEUS INSTRUMENTS

143. Reson Bass 2

144. Deep Bass

145. Eight 0 Eight

146. MOOG Wave 1

147. MOOG Wave 2

148. MOOG Wave 3

149. EMU RECTIFIER 1

150. MOOG RECTANGLE 1

151. MOOG RECTANGLE 2

152. MOOG RECTANGLE 3

153. MOOG RECTANGLE 4

154. MOOG RECTANGLE 5

155. Ring Mod Wave

156. Ice Bell

157. Bronze Age

158. Iron Plate

159. Aluminum

160. Lead Beam

161. Steel Xtract

162. Winter Glass

163. Ice Wash

164. Hollow Wash

165. Cluster

166. Swirly

167. Nyles Noise

168. Mellow Pad

169. Syn String 1

170. Syn String 2

171. Syn String 3

172. Thick String Wave

173. Silk Veil

174. Mecha Vox

175. Techno Vox

Page 192: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual168

MORPHEUS INSTRUMENTS

PERCUSSION INSTRUMENTS176. Rack Bell

177. Solder Sucker

178. Rasp Shaker

179. Iron Rattle

180. Burst Hats

181. Vise Grips

182. Record Scratch 1

183. Record Scratch 2

184. Record Scratch 3

185. Record Scratch 4

186. Record Scratch 5

187. Record Scratch 6

188. Record Scratch 7

189. Modular Scratch

190. Distorto Kick

191. Beef Kick Rap

192. Bass 909 #2

193. High Snare

194. Snap Snare

195. Snare 3

196. Crushed Snare

197. Noise Hat

198. Bass Drum

199. Kick 909

200. Kick 909 #2

201. Dry Bass Drum

202. Liquid Drum

203. Power Kick

204. Cowbell

205. Tamb707Noiz

206. Shaker 808

207. Shaker 2

208. NoizTambHit

209. Open Hat

210. Foot Hat

211. Tip Hat

212. Hi Hat 808

213. Open Hi Hat

214. Closed Hat

215. Hip Hat

216. Hip Hat 2

217. Rim Shot

218. Snare Drum 1

219. Snare Drum 2

220. Snare 808

221. Rim 808 Shot

222. Electric Snare 4

223. ROB 808 Claps

224. Dry 909 Clap

225. Open Hat 909

226. Closed Hat 909

227. Shaman Snare 1

228. Shaman Snare 2

229. Shaman Snare 3

230. Ware Snare

231. Snare 5

232. Snare 909 1

233. Snare 909 2

234. Film Click

235. All Kicks

236. All Snares

237. Hats & Noise

238 Rap Scratch A

239. Rap Scratch B

240. Conga Hits

241. Clave Log Drum

242. Combined Hit

See the PercussionInstrument LocationDiagrams on thefollowing pages.

Page 193: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 169

B3 WAVES - DRAWBAR SETTINGS

••• You can add animationto the single cycle waves bymodulating their pitch orvolume with the LFO.

DRAWBAR DIAGRAMSEach drawbar controls the volume of its associated harmonic or over-tone. The 8' drawbar is the fundamental pitch of the sound.

Scale Interval

8' 4' 2' 1'1 '132 '2

3 1 '35

SUB

-HA

RM

ON

IC

SUB

-3rd

HA

RM

ON

IC

FUN

DA

MEN

TAL

2nd

HA

RM

ON

IC

3rd

HA

RM

ON

IC

4th

HA

RM

ON

IC

5th

HA

RM

ON

IC

6th

HA

RM

ON

IC

8th

HA

RM

ON

IC

Off

Full Volume

Sub-Octave

5thUnison

Octave12th

15th17th

19th22nd

5 '1316'

16' 8'

4'

2' 1'

B3 Wave 5

87654321

654321

5 '13 1 '1

31 '35

2 '23

2'

B3 Wave 6

87654321

87654321

1'16' 8' 4'5 '13 1 '3

5 1 '13

2 '23

16' 8'

4'

2' 1'

87654321

B3 Wave 1

5 '13 1 '1

31 '352 '2

3 8'

4' 2'

1'

B3 Wave 2

87654321

87654321

16' 1 '132 '2

3 1 '355 '1

3

16' 8'

4'

2'

1'

B3 Wave 4

87654321

654321

2 '23 1 '1

31 '355 '1

3

Page 194: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual170

PERCUSSION INSTRUMENT LOCATIONS

Dance Drums 2Instrument 002

Dry

909

Cla

p

MIDIKey #

24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Dry

Bas

s D

rum

Liq

uid

Dru

mSh

amen

Sna

re #

3

Sham

en S

nare

#1

Clo

sed

Hat

909

Op

en H

at 9

09El

ectr

ic S

nare

4Ba

ss D

rum

War

e Sn

are

Snap

Sna

re

Sham

en S

nare

#2

Rim

808

Sho

tSh

aker

2Sh

amen

Sna

re #

1

War

e Sn

are

Snap

Sna

re

Rim

Sho

tH

ip H

atH

ip H

at 2

Op

en H

atRO

B 80

8 C

lap

s

Cow

bell

Rim

Sho

tC

lose

d H

at

Pow

er K

ick

Snar

e D

rum

2

War

e Sn

are

Beef

Kic

k Ra

pSn

ap S

nare

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckSn

are

5

Tip

Hat

Foot

Hat

Op

en H

at

Beef

Kic

k Ra

pTa

mb7

07N

oiz

Cym

bal

Bock

Cla

ve

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckSn

are

5

Tip

Hat

Cym

bal

Kick

909

Rim

Sho

tH

ip H

atH

i-Hat

Op

en H

i-Hat

Kick

'n 8

08Sn

are

808

Rim

Sho

tH

ip H

at

Clo

sed

Hat

Op

en H

i-Hat

Kille

r 80

8Sn

are

Dru

m 2

Sna

re D

rum

1W

are

Snar

eBa

ss D

rum

Snap

Sna

reH

igh

Snar

eD

isto

rto-

Kick

Snar

e 5

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga T

one

Bass

Con

gaC

onga

Con

gaBe

ef K

ick

Rap

Cym

bal

Chi

kBe

ef K

ick

Rap

Snar

e 5

Kick

909

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Bass

909

#2

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckSn

are

5C

onga

Ton

eBa

ss C

onga

Kick

909

Snar

e 90

9

Rim

Sho

t

Pow

er K

ick

MIDIKey #

36 48 60 72 84 96

Kick

909

#2

Snar

e 1

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ck

Snar

e D

rum

2

Bass

Dru

m 2

Snap

Sna

reH

igh

Snar

eBa

ss D

rum

Snar

e 3

Cru

shed

Sna

re

Snar

e 5

War

e Sn

are

Beef

Kic

k Ra

pSn

ap S

nare

Bass

Dru

mSh

amen

Sna

re 1

Rim

Sho

tH

ip H

atH

ip H

at 2

Kick

'n 8

08RO

B 80

8 C

lap

s

Shak

erC

lose

d H

i-Hat

Op

en H

i-Hat

Noi

zTam

bHit

Cym

bal

Tip

-Hat

Foot

-Hat

Op

en H

at

Elec

tro-

Cla

veBo

ck-C

lave

Kick

909

Snar

e 90

9 #1

Snar

e 90

9 #1

Rim

Sho

tH

ip H

atH

ip H

at 2

Op

en H

i-Hat

TR80

8 Ki

ckSn

are

808

Rim

Sho

tSh

aker

Op

en H

i-Hat

Cow

bell

Hi-H

at 8

08N

oise

Hat

Chi

kC

onga

Ton

eC

onga

Bas

sC

onga

C

onga

C

onga

W

ah-M

ute

Beef

Kic

k Ra

p

Kick

909

90

9 Sn

are

Bass

909

#2

Snar

e 90

9 #1

Snar

e 90

9 #1

Clo

sed

Hi-H

at

Dance Drums 1Instrument 001

Page 195: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 171

PERCUSSION INSTRUMENT LOCATIONS

Elec

tric

Sna

re #

4

Snar

e 5

Snar

e 5

Snar

e 90

9 #1

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ck

MIDIKey #

3624 48 60 72 84 96

Snar

e D

rum

#2

Snap

Sna

reW

are

Snar

eEl

ectr

ic S

nare

#4

Sham

en S

nare

#3

Sham

en S

nare

#2

Sham

en S

nare

#1

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snar

e 5

War

e Sn

are

Snar

e 5

Snap

Sna

reH

igh

Snar

eSn

are

#3Sh

amen

Sna

re #

3C

rush

ed S

nare

Snar

e D

rum

#2

Dry

909

Cla

p

Dry

909

Cla

pSn

ap S

nare

Snar

e 5

War

e Sn

are

Elec

tric

Sna

re #

4

Cru

shed

Sna

reRi

m S

hot

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snar

e 90

9 #2

909

Snar

e 3

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snar

e 5

Snar

e 5

War

e Sn

are

War

e Sn

are

War

e Sn

are

Sham

en S

nare

#3

Snap

Sna

re

Sham

en S

nare

#1

Sham

en S

nare

#2

Sham

en S

nare

#3

Dry

909

Cla

pEl

ectr

ic S

nare

#4

Snar

e 5

Rim

Sho

t

ROB

808

Cla

ps

Snar

e 80

8Sn

ap S

nare

Snar

e 80

8Ri

m S

hot

Snar

e 90

9 #2

909

Snar

e 3

Sham

en S

nare

#1

Sham

en S

nare

#2

Sham

en S

nare

#3

Sham

en S

nare

#1

War

e Sn

are

Snap

Sna

reRi

m S

hot

Snar

e 80

8Sn

are

Dru

m #

2Sn

are

5W

are

Snar

eSh

amen

Sna

re #

2H

igh

Snar

eSn

are

5Sn

are

5El

ectr

ic S

nare

#4

Sham

en S

nare

#1

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snap

Sna

reC

rush

ed S

nare

Snar

e 90

9 #2

Snar

e D

rum

#2

Cru

shed

Sna

reSn

are

#3Ri

m S

hot

Hig

h Sn

are

Sham

en S

nare

#1

Hig

h Sn

are

Elec

tric

Sna

re #

4

All SnaresInstrument 236

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ck

MIDIKey #

36 48 60 72 84 96

Kick

909

#2

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckBa

ss D

rum

Pow

er K

ick

Beef

Kic

k Ra

p

Bass

Dru

mTR

808

Kick

Kick

'n 8

08Be

ef K

ick

Rap

Ki

ck 9

09

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ck

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckD

isto

rto-

Kick

Dry

Bas

s D

rum

Kick

'n 8

08Be

ef K

ick

Rap

Beef

Kic

k Ra

p

Beef

Kic

k Ra

p

Beef

Kic

k Ra

p

Pow

er K

ick

Pow

er K

ick

Dry

Bas

s D

rum

Bass

909

#2

Bass

909

#2

Bass

909

#2

Bass

Dru

m

Bass

Dru

mBa

ss 9

09 #

2Ki

ck 9

09

909

Kick

Kick

909

#2

Kick

'n 8

08D

ry B

ass

Dru

mD

ry B

ass

Dru

m

Kick

'n 8

08Ra

p B

eef K

ick

Bass

Dru

mBa

ss 9

09 #

2Ki

ck 9

09

Bass

909

#2

Dry

Bas

s D

rum

Dry

Bas

s D

rum

Bass

Dru

mKi

ck'n

808

Kick

909

#2

Pow

er K

ick

Bass

Dru

m

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckBe

ef K

ick

Rap

Be

ef K

ick

Rap

D

ry B

ass

Dru

mKi

ck 9

09 #

2Ki

ck 9

09 #

2D

ry B

ass

Dru

mPo

wer

Kic

kBe

ef K

ick

Rap

Ba

ss D

rum

Dis

tort

o-Ki

ckPo

wer

Kic

kTR

808

Kick

2Ki

ck 9

09Ki

ck 9

09 #

2Ki

ck 9

09 #

2Ki

ck 9

09 #

2D

ry B

ass

Dru

mKi

ck 9

09 #

2Ki

ck 9

09 #

2D

ry B

ass

Dru

mPo

wer

Kic

kBe

ef K

ick

Rap

Ba

ss D

rum

Beef

Kic

k Ra

p

All KicksInstrument 235

Page 196: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual172

PERCUSSION INSTRUMENT LOCATIONS

Foot

Hat

Op

en H

at 9

09Sh

aker

2C

lose

d H

at 9

09

Op

en H

atTi

p H

at

MIDIKey #

3624 48 60 72 84 96

Tip

Hat

Op

en H

atO

pen

Hat

909

Clo

sed

Hat

909

Tip

Hat

Op

en H

at F

oot

Hat

Tip

Hat

Op

en H

atTi

p H

at

Foot

Hat

Clo

sed

Hi-H

atH

ip H

at 2

Op

en H

atTi

p H

atFo

ot H

atO

pen

Hat

Op

en H

at

Tip

Hat

Foot

Hat

Op

en H

at

Tip

Hat

Foot

Hat

Tip

Hat

Hip

Hat

Hip

Hat

2

Tip

Hat

Op

en H

at

Shak

er 8

08C

lose

d H

atO

pen

Hi-H

at

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

Clo

sed

Hat

909

Clo

sed

Hat

Op

en H

i-Hat

Tip

Hat

Op

en H

at

Clo

sed

Hat

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

Shak

er 8

08C

lose

d ha

t

Clo

sed

Hat

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

Op

en H

atFo

ot H

atTi

p H

atO

pen

Hat

Op

en H

i-Hat

Clo

sed

Hat

909

Hip

Hat

Shak

er 8

08

Op

en H

i-Hat

Clo

sed

Hat

3rd

Oct

. Whi

te N

oise

Noi

seH

ip H

atSh

aker

808

Clo

sed

Hat

Op

en H

i-Hat

Clo

sed

Hat

Hip

Hat

Foot

Hat

Tip

Hat

Op

en H

at3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

seC

lose

d H

atO

pen

Hi-H

atO

pen

Hi-H

at3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se3r

d O

ct. W

hite

Noi

se

Clo

sed

Hat

Hats & NoiseInstrument 237

Scra

tch

1

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

4M

odul

ar S

crat

ch

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

5

MIDIKey #

3624 48 60 72 84 96

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 4

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

4RS

crat

ch 4

Scra

tch

4M

odul

ar S

crat

chSc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

1

Scra

tch

3Sc

ratc

h 2

Scra

tch

1

Scra

tch

5Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

4Sc

ratc

h 6

Scra

tch

7Sc

ratc

h 8

Scra

tch

1

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

5

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

7Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

7Sc

ratc

h 5

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Scra

tch

4Sc

ratc

h 4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

8Sc

ratc

h 2

Scra

tch

5Sc

ratc

h 4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

8Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

5Sc

ratc

h 4

Scra

tch

4Sc

ratc

h 6

Scr

atch

7Sc

ratc

h 8

Scr

atch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Scr

atch

4 S

crat

ch 4

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

8Sc

ratc

h 7

Scr

atch

5M

odul

ar S

crat

ch S

crat

ch 4

Scr

atch

6

Scra

tch

5

Rap Scratch AInstrument 238

Page 197: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 173

PERCUSSION INSTRUMENT LOCATIONS

Scra

tch

2

MIDIKey #

36 48 60 72 84 96

Scra

tch

2

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

2

Scra

tch

1

Scra

tch

5M

odul

ar S

crat

chSc

ratc

h 4

Scra

tch

5M

odul

ar S

crat

chSc

ratc

h 4

Scra

tch

1

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

5M

odul

ar S

crat

ch

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 6

Scra

tch

7

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

7Sc

ratc

h 5

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

2Sc

ratc

h 5

Mod

ular

Scr

atch

Scra

tch

4Sc

ratc

h 6

Scra

tch

7Sc

ratc

h 8

Scra

tch

2

Scra

tch

7Sc

ratc

h 8

Scra

tch

6Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

8Sc

ratc

h 7

Scra

tch

5M

odul

ar S

crat

chSc

ratc

h 4

Scra

tch

6 S

crat

ch 7

Scra

tch

8 S

crat

ch 2

Scra

tch

5M

odul

ar S

crat

ch S

crat

ch 4

Scratch 7

Scratch 7

Scra

tch

6

Rap Scratch BInstrument 239

Tum

ba T

one

MIDIKey #

36 48 60 72 84 96

Tum

ba T

one

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Op

en

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Clo

sed

Con

ga S

lap

Op

enC

onga

Sla

p C

lose

dC

onga

Ton

eTu

mba

Ton

e

Tum

ba T

one

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Clo

sed

Con

ga S

lap

Tum

ba T

one

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Op

enC

onga

Ton

eC

onga

Sla

p O

pen

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Op

enC

onga

Sla

pTu

mba

Ton

e

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Clo

sed

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga T

one

Tum

ba T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Op

enC

onga

Sla

p C

lose

dC

onga

Sla

pTu

mba

Ton

eC

onga

Ton

eC

onga

Sla

p O

pen

Con

ga S

lap

Op

enC

onga

Ton

eC

onga

Sla

p C

lose

dC

onga

Ton

eTu

mba

Ton

eC

onga

Sla

p C

lose

dC

onga

Sla

p C

lose

dC

onga

Ton

eTu

mba

Ton

e C

onga

Ton

eTu

mba

Ton

eC

onga

Sla

p O

pen

Con

ga S

lap

Con

ga S

lap

Tum

ba T

one

Con

ga T

one

Con

ga S

lap

Op

en

Con

ga S

lap

Op

en

Conga HitsInstrument 240

Page 198: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual174

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

The Z-Plane filters are categorized into groups of: Flangers, VowelFilters, Traditional Filters, Parametric Filters, Instrument Models, etc. Asuffix of “4” or “.4” indicates filter is square, not cube and does notcontain a Transform 2 axis.

FLANGERSMembers of this filter family contain a series of notches with variousdepths, widths and frequencies. The traditional flange effect is createdby sweeping different frequency notches with a real time controller.Another application for flangers is enhanced dynamic expression atnote-on by using velocity to modulate the frequencies of the notchesand overall cut-off. These filters can simulate different pick positionson guitar strings and various locations of drum, mallet and cymbalstrikes, etc.

F000 Null FilterF001 Low Pass Flange .4

Morph: Starts with high end roll-off and deep, narrow notches at500Hz, 100Hz, 200Hz, 400Hz and 800Hz and transforms into lessdeep, wider notches at 11799Hz, 13813Hz, 16169Hz, 17495Hz and18928Hz with no roll-off.Freq. Tracking: Moves the notches in the first frame of the Morphaxis up two octaves. The second frame is completely flat. Tracksfilter to keyboard frequencies with Note-on key assignment.Controls brightness.Transform 2: Not used.

F002 Low Pass Flange Bk .4A series of deep notches spaced at octave intervals morphing toless severe, more closely clustered high frequency notches. Anadditional lowpass filter is at the start of the Morph, opening asthe maximum offset is reached.Morph: Modulate this to create multi-flanging effects.Freq. Tracking: Tracks flangers across the keyboard. Velocity con-trols brightness.Transform 2: Not used.

F003 Flange 2 .4This flanger has a series of 6 notches placed at octaves, not lin-early. Frame 1 starts with notches at 50, 100, 200, 400, 800, and1600Hz.Morph: Moves all of the notches up in frequency to above 10kHz,with decreasing depth. This means that the deepest flanging effectis obtained in the first 1/3 to 1/2 of the morph parameter range.Note that deep notches can cut out the fundamental of a soundwhich might decrease the volume of the note.Freq. Tracking: Moves the notches to 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400,12800Hz, which allows key tracking to keep the “sweet spot” ofthe flanger centered over the harmonics of the note.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 199: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 175

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F004 CubeFlangerA flanging filter featuring deep notches tuned in octaves and asteep roll-off of high frequencies when all axes have no offset.High settings for Transform 2 can produce some rather metallic-sounding overtones. Apart from flanging effects, this filter can beused in much the same way as a standard resonant synth filter.Morph: Tunes the filter notches.Freq. Tracking: Controls lowpass filter cutoff point.Transform 2: Increases resonance and introduces some peaks.

F005 Flange3.4Notches are spaced at a ratio of 1.61 between notch frequencies,starting at 40Hz. This spacing means that notches will not fall ontop of all of the harmonics of a sound at once. Instead, theyshould hit harmonics one at a time as they are swept in frequency.Traditional flangers have notches spaced linearly, not log spaced.Morph: Moves all of the notches up above 10kHz, with the relativefrequency spacing decreasing. The deepest flange effect will hap-pen in the lower 1/3 to 1/5 of the morph parameter range.Freq. Tracking: Sets the initial tuning of the notches, moving all ofthe notches up from 40Hz to 325Hz as the base frequency.Transform 2: Not used.

F006 Flange 4.4A highly resonant flanger /filter type. Sweeping the Morph axisproduces dramatic effects. The Filter Frequency Track parametercan be used to tune the flanger; higher values produce more opensounds.Morph: Increase to raise the cutoff frequency and vary the gain ofthe various peaks and notches.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F007 Flange 5A complex flange possessing some vocal-sounding characteristics.Sweeping along the Morph or Freq. Track axes produces flanger-like effects.Morph: Tunes the notches.Freq. Tracking: Spreads the notches.Transform 2: Increase this to move the filter toward a more flatcurve.

F008 Flange 6.4Introduces both peaks and notches which start widely spaced andbecome more tightly distributed as Morph Offset reaches maxi-mum. The center frequencies for the various filter bands movetowards higher ranges as the Morph or Filter Freq. Track param-eters are swept upward; the effect is not unlike a sweeping ofmultiple resonant band-pass filters.

Page 200: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual176

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F009 Flange 6R.4This is a variation of filter 008, Flange 6.4. It is a bit more reso-nant-sounding, due in part to higher ‘Q’ settings. Sweeping theMorph axis can produce the syllable ‘yi’.Morph: Sweep filter frequency bands up and together whenmodulated in a positive direction.Freq. Tracking: Sweep filter frequency bands up and together whenmodulated in a positive direction.Transform 2: Not used.

F010 Flanger 7.4A series of harmonically related notches is moved from the lower-midrange to the upper-midrange as this filter is moved along theFrequency Tracking axis. Morphing brings in the flanging effectMorph: Use this to sweep the notches.Freq. Tracking: Use this to tune the notches.Transform 2: Not used.

F011 BriteFlnge.4A series of notches, tuned in octaves, are swept upward and finallyconverge at 19.5kHz as this filter is pushed up along the Morphaxis. A small bump at about 15kHz is introduced to maintainbrightness when Morph is at completely offset.Morph: Increasing this value sweeps the filter notches upward andtogether.Freq. Tracking: Increasing this value raises the lowpass filter cutoffpoint.Transform 2: Not used.

F012 Flng>Flng1Morph: Sweeps from flange 1 to flange 2Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrum.Transform 2: Provides volume and brightness control with velocityand/or key positionComments: Key tracking enhances the depth of the flange. Tryadding velocity to Frequency Tracking for more “Fun”.

F013 0>Flng2Morph: Reveals flat to flange filterFreq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrumTransform 2: Adds volume, different flangeComments: Nice for introducing a subtle flange to a pure sound.Velocity has a natural effect increasing flange depth, volume andbrightness.

Page 201: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 177

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F014 Flng>Flng3bMorph: Sweeps from flange 1 to 2Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to enhance flangingTransform 2: Increases depth of flangeComments: A gentle sweeper.

F015: Flng>Flng4Morph: Sweeps flangeFreq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to enhance flanging.Transform 2: Reduces depth of flange effect with Morph offset,otherwise, increases flange depth.

F016 Flng>Flng5Morph: Sweeps from flange 1 to 2Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to enhance flanging.Transform 2: Increases depth of flange, more bell-like.Comments: Morphing sweeps gently, but Transform 2 adds moredepth and introduces a bell-like quality to the flange.

F017 Flng>Flng6Morph: Sweeps from flange 1 to 2.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Provides more brightness and flange.

F018 Flng>FlngTMorph: Sweeps between flat and flange.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Provides more brightness and flange.Comments: A gentle-touch flanger. Low Transform 2 gives a softchorus on morphing. Higher Transform 2 gives exaggerated depth.

F019 Flng>FlngCMorph: Sweeps from open to closed response with all other axes at0.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness.Transform 2: Adds extra flange.

F020 CO>FlngTMorph: Sweeps from a reveal (almost flat) point to low pass peaksFreq. Tracking: Raises frequency of peaks.Transform 2: Increases depth of flange.

Page 202: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual178

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

DIPTHONGSImplemented with parametric equalizer subsections, the resonances donot have the traditional overall lowpass effect that a true vocal reso-nance would have. Instead, they are placed at the same frequency asthe resonances would be found in a true vowel, but the response athigh frequencies is essentially flat to allow high frequencies of thesamples to get through the filter.

The Morph axis controls movement between vowels. Key tracking iscontrolled by Frequency Tracking. Brightness and depth of effect iscontrolled by Transform 2. In certain filters, brightness is controlledby assigning velocity to Frequency Tracking. Each paravowel “A”contains peaks at 800 1150, 2800, 3500 and 4950Hz. Each paravowel“E” contains peaks at 400, 1600, 2700, 3300 and 4900Hz. Each “O”has peaks at 450, 800, 2830, 3500 and 4950Hz. Each “U” has peaks at325, 700, 2530, 3500 and 4950Hz.

F021 AEParLPVowThis paravowel has a low pass filter to provide additional roll off,when desired. Otherwise, it behave as the other paravowels.Morph: Controls movement between vowels. Try setting Trans-form 2 to 255 for additional brightness.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls volume, depth of effect.

F022 AEParaVowelMorph: Controls movement between vowels. Try setting Trans-form 2 to 255.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances, with000 providing the lowest resonance amplitude, and 255 providingthe highest resonance amplitude.

F023 AOLpParaVowThis paravowel has a low pass filter to provide additional roll off,when desired. Otherwise, it behaves as the other paravowels.Morph: Controls movement between vowels. Try setting Trans-form 2 to 255.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances.

F024 AOParaVowelMorph: Controls movement between vowels.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances.

Page 203: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 179

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F025 AUParaVow.4Morph: Controls movement between vowels.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances.

F026 UOParaVow.4Morph: Controls movement between vowels.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances.

F027 SftEOVowel4Morph: Controls movement between vowels.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances.

F028 SoftEOAEMorph: Controls movement between vowels.Freq. Tracking: Shifts all of the resonances up in frequency.Transform 2: Controls the amplitude of all of the resonances.

F029 Vocal CubeMorph: Sweeps frequencies.Freq. Tracking: Assign to velocity for brightness control.Transform 2: Tunes filter.

F030 C1-6 Harms4Morph: Sweeps between a notch at 190Hz to a series of closelyspaced peaks from 120Hz to 640HzFreq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard. Try assigning velocityto Frequency Tracking for brightness control.Transform 2: Not used.

F031 Voce.4Morph: Controls movement between “oo” and “ee”.Freq. Tracking: Designed for velocity control of brightness. (Trans-forms to frequencies two octaves higher.)Transform 2: Not used.

F032 ChoralComb4Morph: Sweeps between different frequency notches tuned forvocal formants.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 204: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual180

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F033 Bassutoi.4Morph: Controls movement between “yu” and “ee”.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range and controlsbrightness with velocity assigned.Transform 2: Not used.

F034 Be Ye.4Designed to say “Be Ye”.Morph: Sweeps vocal formants.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range and controlsbrightness with velocity assigned.Transform 2: Not used.

F035 Ee-Yi.4Morph: Controls movement between vowels “e” and “i”.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range and controlsbrightness with velocity assigned.Transform 2: Not used.

F036 Ii-Yi.4Morph: Controls movement between vowels.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range and controlsbrightness with velocity assigned.Transform 2: Not used.

F037 Uhrrrah.4Morph: Roars like a lion.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range and controlsbrightness with velocity assigned.Transform 2: Not used.

F038 YeahYeah.4See “What Yeah” preset.Morph: Moves between “ee” and “ya” sounds.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard range and controlsbrightness when assigned to velocity.Transform 2: Not used.

F039 Vow>Vow1Morph: Sweeps between “ah” and “oh”.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Provides volume and brightness control with velocityand/or key position.Comments: Transform 2 increases volume and depth of voweleffect.

Page 205: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 181

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F040 Vow>Vow2Morph: Sweeps between “ee” and “oh”.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Provides volume and brightness control with velocityand/or key position.Comments: Morphing sweeps between vowels- slight “E” effect.

F041 YahYahs.4Morph: Sweeps between “eeya” and “aa”.Freq. Tracking: Introduces frequencies two octaves higher for keytracking and brightness control.Transform 2: Not used.

F042 YoYo.4Morph: Sweeps between “ee” and “oh” sounds.Freq. Tracking: Introduces frequencies two octaves higher for keytracking and brightness control.Transform 2: Not used.

F043 VowelSpaceDr. William Martens developed this filter cube, which allows anyvowel to be approximated with only two parameters.Morph: Sweeps the first formant of the vowel from 150Hz up to850Hz.Freq. Tracking: Sweeps the second formant from 500Hz up to2500Hz.Transform 2: Changes the vowel “stress.” Low stress means that allof the vowel frequencies collapse to a relaxed “schwa” sound.Maximum Transform produces the maximum excursion (stress)for all of the vowel frequencies.

STANDARDThese filters are variations on traditional 2 and 4-pole filter models

F044 BrickWalLP.4This filter features an extreme rolloff at the cutoff point, whichmoves from 100Hz to 3000Hz. Use this filter to produce low-resonance filter sweeps, or to selectively filter out high frequenciesin the source sound.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter depth and provides gentler roll-offbeginning ~3000Hz.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 206: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual182

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F045 BrickWal LP2Morph: Controls filter ‘Q’.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter cutoff.Transform 2: Use to control filter depth.

F046 MdQ 2PoleLPA single pole of this filter is swept from low to high as the filter isMorphed. This filter produces nice, not-too-resonant sweep effects.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter cutoff.Transform 2: Controls resonance.

F047 HiQ 2PoleLPA more resonant version of filter 046, again with a single fre-quency band being swept about according to Morph.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter cutoff.Transform 2: Controls resonance.

F048 MdQ 4PoleLPSimilar to filters 046 and 047, in this filter two of the poles (tunedto the same frequency) are swept to create a steeper rolloff at thecutoff point, re-creating the classic 4-pole lowpass filter effect. Thisfilter features medium resonance which can be accentuated via theTransform 2 offset.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter cutoff.Transform 2: Controls resonance.

F049 HiQ 4PoleLPAgain, (as with filters 046-047), two poles tuned to the samefrequency are swept to create a steep rolloff at the filter cutoffpoint. This filter features high ‘Q’, which can be controlled viaTransform 2.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter cutoff.Transform 2: Controls resonance.

F050 2poleLoQLP4This is basically a 2-pole lowpass filter which can be swept from60Hz to 19.5kHz. Modulating the Frequency Tracking parameterupward will increase filter resonance. A good choice for emulatingcertain kinds of analog filter effects.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls resonance.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 207: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 183

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F051 4 PoleLoQ.4A resonant low-pass filter emulation. Morphing creates the famil-iar filter sweep effect.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter resonance.Transform 2: Not used.

F052 4PoleMidQ.4A 4-filter version of the classic 4-pole resonant filter found in mostanalog synthesizers.Morph: Controls filter cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Controls resonance (“Q”).Transform 2: Not used.

F053 2p>4p 0Morph: Opens up the filter making it brighter.Freq. Tracking: This adds a small amount of resonance (Q) to thefilter.Transform 2: Changes from a 4-pole filter (-24dB/oct.) to a 2-polefilter (-12dB/oct.).Comments: This All Pole filter is modeled on traditional lowpassfilter. It has a soft resonance boost.

F054 LowPassPlusMorph: Sweeps from octave peaks starting at 220Hz toinharmonic, higher frequency peaks.Freq. Tracking: Keyboard tracking.Transform 2: Brightens the response.

F055 Low Past.4Poles with fairly high ‘Q’ settings are grouped into the lower- toupper-midrange. Sweeping along the Morph or Frequency Track-ing axes can produce some rather vocal-sounding effects.Morph: Use to sweep the frequencies of the pole.Freq. Tracking: Use to tune the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F056 APass.4Simple lowpass filter with gentle rolloff above 200Hz; morphs toflat.Morph: Gentle lowpass to flat response.Freq. Tracking: Also moves the filter towards a flat response,allowing you to control the depth of filteringTransform 2: Not used.Comments: A good choice when more subtle filtering is desired.

Page 208: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual184

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F057 HPSweep.4A highly resonant high-pass filter which generally rolls off fre-quencies steeply below ~2.5kHz.A low Morph Offset will create arelatively flat response (with a gentle cut to the lower frequencies),so the most subtle filtering is achieved with Morph Offset set to000, and Frequency Tracking set to 255.Morph: Positive values move the filter higher in frequency.Freq. Tracking: Positive values move the filter toward a flattercurve.Transform 2: Not used.

F058 HiSwept1.4A highly resonant filter with ‘Q’ increasing as the Morph or Fre-quency Tracking parameters are swept upward. Increase the valuefor Frequency Tracking to accentuate this brightness and reso-nance.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Control filter cutoff and resonance.Transform 2: Not used.

F059 HghsSwpt2.4A more open-sounding version of filter 058. Raises both the filtercutoff point and filter ‘Q’.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Raises both the filter cutoff point andfilter ‘Q’.Transform 2: Not used.

F060 HighAccent.4The center frequencies remain constant throughout all permuta-tions of this filter along the Morph and Frequency Tracking axes;what changes are the ‘Q’ settings for the various poles and zeros.This allows you to accentuate various resonances, (generally in theupper frequency ranges), of the source sound by manipulating theMorph Offset point and the Frequency Tracking parameter.Morph: Controls ‘Q’ of the various poles.Freq. Tracking: Higher values produce brighter, thinner sounds.Transform 2: Not used.

F061 HiPassSweep.4A high-pass filter with the cutoff point moving from about 160Hzto upwards of 2.5kHz (with a sizable gain in resonance) as thefilter is morphed upward.Morph: Higher settings increase cutoff frequency and ‘Q’.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter depth.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 209: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 185

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F062 Deep CombsThis filter can provide a tremendous variety of comb-filtering andfilter sweep effects. Higher frequencies are sharply attenuated withFrequency Tracking and Transform 2 set to low values, so be sureat least one of these is either set in the mid- to high-range, or thata modulator is used to offset.Morph: Positive modulation moves frequency notches towardslower values.Freq. Tracking: Positive modulation moves frequency notchestowards lower values.Transform 2: Positive modulation moves frequency notchestowards lower values.

F063 One PeakMorph: Try setting Transform 2 to 255 for increased brightnessover morph range. Sweeps from a slight peak at 220Hz and roll-offafter 650Hz to a series of even peaks at 220,440, 880Hz, and asmaller odd series at 330, 555 and 770Hz.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter to keyboard.Transform 2: Increases the effect of Morph and provides velocitysensing.

F064 More PeaksMorph: Try setting Transform 2 to 255. Moves from a low cut-offflat frame to a series of peaks at 220, 440, 880, 330, 1000 and2000Hz.Freq. Tracking: Tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Intensifies effect and controls volume.

F065 Rev PeaksMorph: Try setting Transform 2 to 255. Moves from flat with alow-frequency cut-off to a series of peaks at 220, 440, 660, 880,1100 and 1320.Freq. Tracking: Tracks keyboard with notches three octaves higher.Transform 2: Contains higher gain peaks at same frequencies asMorph axis for volume control and deeper effect.

F066 Notcher 2.4Frames 1 and 3 contain multiple, unevenly spaced notches andpeaks, while frames 2 and 4 are essentially flat. Modulating up-ward along the Morph axis, pushes the filter towards flat. Modu-lating Frequency Tracking upwards tends to give the sourcematerial a bit rounder, more ‘open’ sound.Morph: Sweeping over a narrow range with a quick LFO producessome nice rotating speaker effects.Freq. Tracking: Can be used to tune the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 210: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual186

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F067 Ntches2Oct4This filter is composed of a series of notches, tuned in octaves.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Moves notches lower in frequency.Transform 2: Not used. Comments: Maximum shift is two octaves along either axis, for acombined total of four octaves if both axes are modulated.

F068 Odd>+Morph: Changes from odd to even harmonics.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrum.Transform 2: Provides volume and brightness control.Comments: Hints at odd harmonics which are then changed into adifferent shape depending on the position of Transform 2.(Transform 2 mostly respects natural changes in brightness,however.)

F069 VarSlope.4A low-pass filter in which the rolloff above the cutoff point(400Hz) becomes steeper as the value for Morph Offset isincreased.Morph: Changes the slope of the rolloff.Freq. Tracking: Moves the filter toward flat response.Transform 2: Not used.Comments: A good choice when more subtle filtering is desired.

EQUALIZATION FILTERSMost of these filters are variations of traditional parametric EQ filters.

F070 BassEQ 1.4Morph: Contains deep notch at 196Hz, morphing to a slightbump at 132Hz and a dip at 2600Hz.Freq. Tracking: Frequency Tracking opens filter completely atmaximum offset.Transform 2: Not used.

F071 B BOOST.4Morph: Boosts frequencies around 60Hz, sweeping to open re-sponse.Freq. Tracking: Provides gentle rise at 320Hz and 5kHz.Transform 2: Not used.

F072 BssBOOST2.4Morph: Boosts frequencies around 60Hz, sweeping to open re-sponse.Freq. Tracking: Introduces a dip at 320Hz and a peak at 2059Hz.With axes offset, a bump at 60Hz and 1200Hz is introduced.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 211: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 187

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F073 BassDrumEQMorph: Adds low end boost.Freq. Tracking: Tends to smooth out the filter.Transform 2: This adds high end at the expense of low end.Comments: This is an EQ filter designed for bass drums, based on alow pass EQ filter. The transforms tailor to different types of bassdrums.

F074 Snare LPEQ2Morph: Controls brightness.Freq. Tracking: This moves the mid range bump down a bit.Transform 2: This will smooth the boost (widens the “Q”).Comments: This is an EQ filter designed for snares, based on a lowpass EQ filter. There is a strong boost in the 320Hz to 640Hz rangeand some boost on the low end to give it some punch. The trans-forms tailor to different types of snares.

F075 HiHatLPEQMorph: Controls brightness.Freq. Tracking: Tends to make the EQ more complex.Transform 2: Tends to modify the low end.Comments: This is an EQ filter designed for hi hats, based on a lowpass EQ filter. There is a strong boost in the 5kHz to 18kHz rangeand some cut on the low end. The transforms tailor to differenttypes of hi-hats.

COMPLEX FILTERSMany of these filters have never existed for musical applicationsbefore!

F076 HP LP PZMorph: Sets how open or closed the filter is.Freq. Tracking: Sets the transition from high pass to low pass.Transform 2: This sets the sharpness of the cut off.Comments: This Pole/ Zero filter models both low pass and highpass filters.

F077 PZ NotchMorph: Sets the notch's center frequency.Freq. Tracking: This deepens the notch (more cut).Transform 2: This makes the notch wider (widens the “Q”).Comments: This Pole/ Zero filter is a notch that ranges from 80Hzto 10kHz.

Page 212: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual188

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F078 Band-aidMorph: Sets the amount of cut on the high and low frequencies.Freq. Tracking: This widens the band.Transform 2: This softens the amount of cut on the high end.Comments: This Pole/ Zero filter is a band pass that cuts both thehigh and low end of the sample.

F079 LowQHiQMorph: Controls brightness.Freq. Tracking: Changes from a 4-pole filter (-24dB/oct.) to a 2-pole filter (-12dB/oct.)Transform 2: This adds resonance (“Q”) to the filter.Comments: This All Pole filter is modeled on traditional low passfilter types. It can emulate most familiar analog sounds.

F080 Wah4Vib.4Morph: Sweeps from slight rise above 1200Hz to a peak at 590Hzwith roll-off after. Sounds more mellow and rounded as offset isincreased.Freq. Tracking: Tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F081 WaWaMultiple resonant peaks flatten, then invert to become notches asthe value for Morph Offset or Frequency Tracking is increased.Increasing the value for Transform 2 can have the effect of sweep-ing the peaks lower in frequency, inverting the peaks, or both,depending on the settings for Morph Offset and Frequency Track-ing.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Controls polarity of filter gain.Transform 2: Tunes filter and controls polarity of gain.

F082 BrassRez.4Compelling trumpet mute effect.Morph: Try assigning Control A or Velocity to Morph as a note-oncontroller. Increasing Morph Offset reveals less muted, more openresponse. Reverse filter for opposite response.Freq. Tracking: Modulates between a similarly shaped second set ofresonances for additional Note-on control.Transform 2: Not used.

F083 Clr>OboeMorph: Sweeps from Clarinet to OboeFreq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Provides volume and brightness control with velocityand/or key position.Comments: Strong morphing effect with this filter. Transform 2takes care of velocity expressivity.

Page 213: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 189

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F084 0>MuterMorph: Introduces “Mute”.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Selects “Mute” variety.

F085 PZ Syn HornMorph: Controls brightness.Freq. Tracking: This moves the harmonic modifiers higher infrequency.Transform 2: This makes a modest change in brightness (finetuning).Comments: This filter models the harmonic content of a synthhorn, thus will lend a synth horn sound to other samples.

F086 HP BrassGenerally, each frame in this filter cube provides either a steeprolloff of low frequencies or a sharp boost of high frequencies,with one axis arriving at flat response. Note that with Transform 2set to 255, the polarity of the sweep along the Morph axis isreversed. This filter can be a good choice when you need a sharpaccentuation of high-frequency material.Morph: Sweeps the highpass filter, with direction dependent onsetting of Transform 2.Freq. Tracking: Higher values produce thinner, brighter sounds.Transform 2: Sweeps the highpass filter, with direction dependenton setting of Morph Offset.

F087 BrassyBlastThis filter provides several responses similar to that of a lowpassfilter, but with the addition of a gentle bump in the midrange toupper-midrange.Morph: Use to sweep the filter.Freq. Tracking: Adds a resonant bump at about 200Hz, whichflattens out as the value is moved upward.Transform 2: Works similarly to Frequency Tracking, but adds agentle bump at about 8kHz as the offset is increased.Comments: A very smooth-sounding filter, great for brass-typefilter sweep effects.

F088 BrassSwellSimilar to a lowpass filter, but multiple resonant peaks give thisone a bit of a vocal, phase-shifter-like quality.Morph: Use to sweep the filter.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Higher values add midrange “beef” and resonance.

Page 214: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual190

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F089 BrsSwell2.4An emulation of a lowpass filter with low resonance designed forbrass-type filter sweeps.Morph: Moves the cutoff frequency higher, and adds a gentlebump in the upper-midrange.Freq. Tracking: Adds a bit of resonance at the cutoff point, whichbecomes flatter as the filter is morphed upward.Transform 2: Not used.

F090 LoVelTrumA series of tightly spaced peaks is swept upward by each of thefilter transforms, with the brightest sounds obtained at maximumsettings for Morph Offset, Frequency Tracking, and Transform 2.In addition, Transform 2 increases the resonance.Morph and Freq. Tracking: Sweeps the peaks.Transform 2: Tunes the peaks and increases resonance.

F091 Chiffin.4Morph: Sweeps between low frequency notches.Freq. Tracking: Allows the notches to track the keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.Comments: Use with noise to create a chiff sound on windinstruments.

F092 ShakuFilterMorph: Sweeps between peaks at 400Hz, 1600Hz, 2700Hz and3150Hz with roll-off after 30kHz to a mostly flat response with aslight bump at 1900Hz.Freq. Tracking: Keyboard tracking.Transform 2: Controls tone and depth.

F093 CymMorph: Sweeps from peaks at 100Hz, 300Hz, 400Hz, 600Hz,900Hz and 1500Hz to peaks at 200Hz, 600Hz, 800Hz, etc.Freq. Tracking: Keyboard tracking.Transform 2: Deepens the effect.Comments: Designed to make interesting cymbal sounds. BothMorph and Frequency Tracking manipulate frequency sweeps.

F094 VelMarimMorph: Sweeps frequencies of small, closely-spaced peaks.Freq. Tracking: Keyboard tracking.Transform 2: Deepens the effect.Comments: Designed to make dynamic marimba sounds usingmallet and plate sounds.

Page 215: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 191

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F095 EZ Vibez.4Like 098-“Easy Rhodes”, this is essentially a 2-pole low-pass filter,sweeping from a gentle roll-off at 65Hz to reveal a wide openresponse.Morph: Sweeps from lowpass to wide open response.Freq. Tracking: Keyboard tracking.Transform 2: Not used.

F096 Piano 01Designed to make possible a set of Piano presets that sound likethey were recorded with the sustain pedal down.

F097 PianoFltr4This filter functions much like a lowpass filter with a low ‘Q’setting. Cutoff frequency is controlled along the Morph axis.Increasing the value for Frequency Tracking increases overallbrightness. Although this filter is designed to work well for addingexpressiveness to piano-type sounds, it can also be useful in manyinstances when a filter with a gentle slope is required.Morph: Controls cutoff frequency.Freq. Tracking: Controls cutoff frequency and brightness.Transform 2: Not used.

F098 EZ Rhodez4A lowpass filter, with cutoff frequency ranging from about 200Hzto about 5kHz along the Morph axis.Morph: Sets cutoff frequency.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter depth.Transform 2: Not used.

F099 MoogVocodr4Designed to simulate the classic vocoder filter response. Morphsweeps the frequencies. Frequency Tracking produces a more nasaland enclosed effect.Morph: Sweeps frequency.Freq. Tracking: Increases resonance.Transform 2: Not used.

F100 MoogVocSwpSimilar to “MoogVocodr4”, but brighter. Can create variety ofinteresting responses by altering offsets of each axis, such assweeping Morph with Frequency Tracking at maximum.Morph: Sweeps frequency.Freq. Tracking: Increases resonance.Transform 2: Changes the effect of the Morph parameter.

Page 216: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual192

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F101 StrngThing4A series of widely spaced notches produces this filter, which cansound somewhat like a phase shifter when Morphed - especially ifthe value for Frequency Tracking is set fairly high. With MorphOffset and Frequency Tracking set high, the curve is essentiallyflat, with a gentle bump approaching 20kHz, so this filter mightbe a good choice for adding a subtle sparkle to some sounds.Morph: Controls cutoff frequency and depth of notches.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F102 StrSweep.4Set Frequency Tracking between the ranges of 200 and 255, andgently modulate the Morph Offset parameter in its upper rangesfor an effect that will accentuate bowing sounds in string pro-grams.Morph: Positive modulation increases filter center frequencies andresonance.Freq. Tracking: Positive modulation decreases resonance, increasesbrightness slightly.Transform 2: Not used.

F103 BassXpressThis filter provides increased bass, and a sharp notch.Morph: Controls the depth of the notch.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the notch.Transform 2: Controls the lowpass filter cutoff frequency.

F104 Qbase.4Morph: Sweeps from a bright nasal response to accentuated low-frequency boost.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F105 AcGtrRs.4This filter is designed to emulate some of the resonant characteris-tics of an acoustic guitar body. With Morph Offset and FrequencyTracking set to 000, the body is extremely resonant, as if a largeacoustic guitar were close-miked near the sound hole. Vary thevalue for Morph Offset to vary the ‘mic position’. Route velocityto Freq. Tracking for controlling brightness and ‘pick position’.Morph: Controls filter formant notch depth and position.Freq. Tracking: Frequency Tracking.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 217: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 193

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F106 Tube Sust.4Use this filter with broad-band waves to produce sounds character-istic of distorted guitars. The fullest sounds are achieved withMorph Offset set to 255, and Frequency Tracking set to 000Morph: Increasing this increases bass and midrange.Freq. Tracking: Controls the lower-midrange.Transform 2: Not used.

F107 GtrSkwkMorph: Plays the squeak.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Makes brighter, adds more volume and squeak.Comments: Higher Transform 2 allows morphing to “stringsqueak”. Best used with Aux. Env or Function Generator to controlthis. Routing Velocity to Transform 2 will reduce squeak on lowvelocities.

F108 GuitXpressIncreasing the Morph Offset value places a notch in the frequencyspectrum, the tuning of which can be controlled via the Fre-quency Tracking and Transform 2 parameters. In addition, in-creasing the value for Frequency Tracking and/or Transform 2raises the cutoff point of the lowpass filter. This filter can be usedto add a measure of expressiveness, particularly to acoustic instru-ment simulations. Try using velocity to control Transform 2 andkey position to Frequency Tracking. For an additional measure ofcontrol, assign Control A (the mod wheel) to control Morph inthe Note-on Control section.Morph: Increases the depth of the filter notch.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the notch and controls filter cutoff point.Transform 2: Tunes the notch and controls filter cutoff point.

F109 FG MajTrans4This filter features a series of peaks tuned to the intervals found ina major triad. Modulating the Morph Offset from 000 to 255moves the ‘chord’ from first to second inversion; the FrequencyTracking parameter can be used to tune the chord over a range ofseveral octaves. The effect is perhaps easiest to hear applied to oneof the noise waves. It also works well with the RecrdScrch waves.Morph: Moves the ‘chord’ of resonant peaks from first to secondinversion.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the chord.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 218: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual194

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F110 TamMorph: Sweeps frequencies from low to high. Try routing velocityor mod wheel to Morph with offset at 255.Freq. Tracking: Designed for velocity control of volume & bright-ness.Transform 2: Controls brightness and depth.Comments: Designed to make interesting, dynamic tambourinesounds.

F111 HOTwell.4Morph: Sweeps frequency range.Freq. Tracking: Determines degree of frequencies accentuated.Transform 2: Not used.Comments: Works well with bell-like sounds.

F112 Bell.WahaMorph: Sweeps between flat and bell.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: More dissonance and effect.Comments: Morphing can pull bell-like sounds out of any sample.Transform 2 adds more dissonance. This is best used withBellWahb which has a similar action but uses different dissonantpartials.

113 BelwahbMorph: Sweeps between flat and bell.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Controls dissonance and depth of effect.Comments: See BellWaha

F114 0>Bell-Morph: Sweeps from flat to dissonance.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix dissonant partials.Transform 2: Increases bell-like effect, makes brighter, louder.Comments: To be used in conjunction with 0>Bell+. Morphingsweeps partials downwards just away from harmonic values caus-ing bell-like effects.

F115 0>Bell+Morph: Sweeps from flat to dissonance.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix dissonant partials.Transform 2: Increases bell-like effect, makes the sound brighterand louder.Comments: To be used in conjunction with 0>Bell-. Morphingsweeps partials to a different dissonance than with 0>Bell-.

Page 219: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 195

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F116 Bel>Crs>BelMorph: Sweeps from flat to dissonance.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix dissonant partials.Transform 2: Increases bell-like effect. Makes the sound brighterand louder.Comments: Low velocities on Transform 2 reveals a hint of bellswhen Morphing. Higher Transform 2 values create a more bell-likeand dissonant sound.

F117 Chrs>Flng1Morph: Sweeps to a flange effect.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to enhance flange effect.Transform 2: Makes brighter, increases volume.Comments: Degree of flanging effect depends on velocity.

F118 Chrs>Flng2Morph: Sweeps to a flange effect.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to enhance flange effect.Transform 2: Makes brighter, adds volume.Comments: Velocity controls degree of flange effect.

F119 Ev/OdNtch.4Morph: Sweeps from even notches at 200, 400, 800Hz, etc with anoverall low frequency cut-off to notches at 300, 600, 1200,2400Hz, etc. effecting a warm to bright transition.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking.Transform 2: Not used.

F120 Odd/EvnNtchMorph: Provides subtle modulation between odd octave intervalsstarting at 75Hz and even octave intervals starting at 50Hz.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness.Transform 2: Deepens the effect and adds volume.

F121 NotchPkSwp4Morph: Sweeps from nasal to bright; vowel shifts from ‘oh’ to ‘ee’.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness and tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F122 1.5/3KNBPR4Morph: Morphs from thin and high to richer and deeper to a yet adifferent timbre resonance; adds energy.Freq. Tracking: Frequency Tracking thickens the spectral plot.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 220: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual196

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F123 SwingshiftMorph: Try setting Transform 2 to 255 for brighter morph. Modu-lates from low-frequency cut-off to series of peaks at 349Hz,494Hz, 698Hz, 988Hz etc.Freq. Tracking: Tracks filter with keyboard.Transform 2: Adds depth, volume.

F124 500up.4Poles and zeros alternate, spaced at 500Hz intervals. IncreasingMorph Offset boosts the peaks slightly, and greatly deepens thenotches, producing an effect similar to band-pass filtering. Thiseffect is further accentuated by increasing the Frequency Trackingvalue, as well as tuning the entire filter higher.Morph: Increases depth of notches.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F125 C1Harmonic5oct.8RMorph: Try setting Transform 2 to maximum. Controls resonance.Freq. Tracking: Controls resonance.Transform 2: Tunes the filter.

F126 Odd>EvenMorph: Changes from odds to even harmonics.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrum.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Odd harmonics are replaced by evens. Can give an impression a raising one octave.

F127 0>Shp1Morph: Changes from flat to shape.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrum.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Imposes a vowel like shape on a pure sound. (Can beuseful for morphing in and out using two samples.)

F128 0>Shp2Morph: Changes from flat to shape.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrum.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: More vowel like changes than 0>Shape1.

Page 221: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 197

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F129 0>Shp3Morph: Sweeps to shape.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Morphing imposes a shape on the sound. Low velocityfor mellow, high for bright.

F130 Shp>Shp1Starts with peaks every half octave from 66Hz and morphs topeaks every octave beginning at 66Hz Effect is “ee” to “u” withFrequency Tracking fully offset. Transform 2 reveals a completelyflat response with all axes offset.

F131 Lpeq VelMorph: Moves between different “softs” & “brights”.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to maintain spectrum.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Position of the Morph determines the nature of thesoftness and brightness.

F132 CleanSweep4A number of lowpass, highpass and bandpass type effects can beproduced using this filter. It works particularly well on solo brasswaves to produce a variety of mute effects.Morph: Effects range from lowpass with low ‘Q’ to highpass withhigh ‘Q’.Freq. Tracking: Increase for thinner, brighter and more resonantsounds.Transform 2: Not used.

F133 PowerSweepsAlternating resonant peaks and notches, spaced at approximatelyhalf-octave intervals can be used to produce a number of flangingand vocal effects. The direction of Morph depends on the Freq.Tracking setting.Morph: Modulating this sweeps the peaks/notches up and/ordown.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter; determines polarity of Morph.Transform 2: Can also be used to tune the filter.

Page 222: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual198

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F134 TSweep.4A grouping of inharmonically related peaks gives this filter some-thing of a metallic quality, although it can also produce voice-likesounds. Increasing Morph Offset increases overall filter resonanceand raises the cutoff point of the lowpass filter. Frequency Track-ing can be used to tune the filter.Morph: Controls ‘Q’; controls lowpass cutoff.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F135 SweepHiQ1.4Morph: Sweeps from peaks at 150Hz, 430Hz, 870Hz , 1500Hz,3000Hz and 7000Hz to peaks an octave higher.Freq. Tracking: Introduces high Q peaks at 1.2kHz and 3.4kHz tonarrowly spaced peaks at 1500Hz to 15kHz.Transform 2: Not used.

F136 V>FcQuad.4Designed for velocity to control filter cut-off. Each frame has anoctave higher cut-off than the one before it.Morph: Moves from a bump at 320Hz then a brickwall cut-off upan octave.Freq. Tracking: Tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F137 Nexus.4Morph: Moves from a brickwall low pass to higher frequency,relaxed slope response.Freq. Tracking: Frequency Tracking at maximum inverts effect ofmorph.Transform 2: Not used.Comments: Designed for Frequency Tracking to control brightnesswith velocity.

F138 Krators.4Morph: Provides resonant peaks at low-frequencies, morphingfrom lower to higher frequency.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness.Transform 2: Not used.Comments: Designed to control brightness by assigning Velocityto Frequency Tracking.

••• A “brickwall” filter is onewith an extremely steepslope.

Page 223: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 199

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F139 Harmonix.4Morph: Morphs between complex responses sweeping to midfrequency resonances while leaving edges untouched.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness and tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F140 GreenWorld4Morph: A mellow low-frequency sweeper designed for pianoapplications.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness and tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F141 Comb/Swap.4Morph: Controls a series of notches moving from 160Hz to 10kHz.Freq. Tracking: Controls brightness and tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Not used.

F142 Comb/HP.4Morph: Sweeps between a series of low frequency notches to ahigh pass response.Freq. Tracking: Keyboard Tracking and brightness control.Transform 2: Not used.Comments: Control the brightness by assigning Velocity to Fre-quency Tracking.

F143 SwirlyMorph: Moves from series of notches to fewer notches.Freq. Tracking: Tracks keyboard.Transform 2: Alters timbre of effect and adds dynamics.Comments: Try a Transform 2 setting of 255 for a brighter Morph.

F144 Cavatate.4Emphasizes frequencies from 160Hz to 2kHz.Morph: Morphs to a modified high pass response.Freq. Tracking: Brightness control .Transform 2: Not used.

Page 224: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual200

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F145 GentleRZ4A series of unevenly spaced resonant peaks converge to a singlepeak as Morph Offset is increased. The Frequency Tracking offsetprovides a somewhat muted sound (with several gentle bumps inthe mid-frequency range), moving toward a flat response. Sweep-ing this filter produces some very smooth wa-wa effects. Using thisfilter with the trumpet waves can produce sounds suggestive ofFrench Horns.Morph: Modulating this sweeps filter peaks.Freq. Tracking: Use this to control filter depth and cutoff.Transform 2: Not used.

F146 Bendup/SwapThis complex filter features several series of tuned resonant peaksand notches which can seem to bend up or down in pitch depend-ing on the settings for the various Morph, Frequency Tracking,andTransform 2 parameters.Morph: Use to tune the filter.Freq. Tracking: Low values make upward filter sweeps appear tobend pitch up. High values make pitch bend appear to go down.Transform 2: Higher values make the filter sound more open.

F147 BendupThis is similar to filter number 146, except that the bend is alwaysin an upward direction (if the Morph axis is swept in a positivedirection). Frequency Tracking can be used to tune the filter over anearly 2-octave range. Transform 2 is used to set the cutoff pointof the lowpass filter; higher values raise the cutoff point.Morph: Sweeps harmonic peaks.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Increase for a brighter effect.

F148 SKWEEZITThis filter features a complex series of peaks and notches. Varyingthe Morph parameter varies the ‘Q’ settings for most of the peaksand notches, while sweeping the frequency and Q of the first pole.Morph: Sweeps one of the resonant peaks and varies ‘Q’.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Controls resonance.

Page 225: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 201

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F149 Lo/High4A scattering of poles and zeros with fairly high Q settings producesthis very resonant filter. Sweeping the Morph axis produces quitepronounced wa-wa effects in which multiple resonances areclearly audible. Morph Offset and Frequency Tracking can be usedto tune the filter, although with Morph Offset set to 255, the filteris essentially flat.Morph: Positive values increase pole/zero frequencies and decrease‘Q’, opening the filter entirely.Freq. Tracking: Similar to the Morph axis, but a bit higher in pitch.Transform 2: Not used.

F150 SbtleMvmnt4Morphing this filter to reverse the polarity of a series of more-or-less evenly spaced peaks and notches produces an effect moresubdued than some types of filter sweeps. Using velocity or a modwheel (assigned through the Note-on Control section) to controlthe Morph parameter can be useful when developing responsiveplucked-string instrument sounds, such as guitar.Morph: Controls polarity of poles.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F151 Buzzy Pad.4This filter produces a bump at 65Hz and a rolloff above 250Hz atlow Morph values. Increasing the Morph value pushes the bumpup to about 2kHz, and the cutoff of the lowpass filter up to 20kHz.Increasing the value of Frequency Tracking sends the bump higheryet — up to about 8400Hz at maximum offset. The effect ofsweeping the Morph axis is similar to that of a classic 2-polelowpass filter with medium resonance.Morph: Tunes the filter.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F152 Bw5kHz+6.4Lowpass cutoff is set to 400Hz with “0” Morph Offset. In addition,there is a 6 dB bump at 5kHz. The bandwidth of this “bump” iscontrolled by the Morph parameter. Sweeping the Morph Offsetupwards moves the bandwidth setting from very narrow to verywide. Frequency Tracking moves the cutoff frequency of thelowpass filter up to a maximum of 20kHz. The range of effectsavailable is from fairly dramatic to quite subtle.Morph: Controls filter bandwidth.Freq. Tracking: Controls filter cutoff.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 226: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual202

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F153 Bw65Hz/2k.4This filter is similar to filter 152, but in addition to sweeping thebandwidth of a single peak along the Morph and FrequencyTracking axes, the peak itself is swept. The range of the frequencysweep is one octave along either axis, although much greaterranges of change are achieved when both the Morph and Fre-quency Tracking axes are combined. Effects range from gentle,analog-style filter sweeps (with the Frequency Tracking parameterset low), to more ‘digital’ sounding effects in which high-pitched,whistling harmonics are produced.Morph: Controls bandwidth and frequency.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F154 Bb80Hzbw1.4With a Morph Offset value of “0”, the lowpass filter cutoff is set at400Hz, and there is a wide-band bump at 80Hz. Morphing thefilter increases the gain of this bump from 6 dB to 24 dB. Fre-quency Tracking increases the cutoff to 19.5kHz, and decreases thebandwidth of the 80Hz bump.Morph: Controls bandwidth.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F155 HighsTwist4The frequencies of the poles and zeros in this filter remain con-stant as Morph or Freq. Tracking are modulated, but the ‘Q’ valuesare modulated in a variety of ways. The filter is closest to flat (withsome emphasis in the high frequency range and a small bump atabout 200Hz) when Morph Offset and Frequency Tracking areboth set to 000. Modulating either or both of these parametersupward emphasizes more of the highs, with increased values forFrequency Tracking, rolling off the lows as well.Morph: Controls filter ‘Q’.Freq. Tracking: Modulate upward for thinner, brighter sounds.Transform 2: Not used.

F156 CubixMorphing this filter produces a lowpass filter sweep effect, whilepushing the Frequency Tracking parameter in a positive directionmoves the filter towards a more flat response, with a bit of subtleemphasis in the higher frequencies.Morph: Produces low-pass filter effects.Freq. Tracking: Use to control key tracking or to set overall filterdepth.Transform 2: Controls brightness.

Page 227: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 203

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F157 Intervallc4This filter is similar to the ‘Bendup/Swap’ filter, but here the effectis even more pronounced. With Frequency Tracking set to 000,pushing the Morph Offset higher produces a downward sweep of aseries of very resonant harmonics. Set Frequency Tracking to 255,however, and the sweep reverses. Other effects can be achieved byexperimenting with the interaction between these two parameters.Because of its metallic overtones, this filter can make a goodchoice for simulating certain percussion instruments, such as steeldrums and kalimbas.Morph: Causes a downward sweep of harmonic intervals.Freq. Tracking: Reverses Morph sweep.Transform 2: Not used.

F158 EvenCuts4This filter produces a series of notches in the frequency spectrum(based on the even harmonic series), which turn into small bumpswhen morphed.Morph: Controls the depth of the notches/height of the bumps.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the notches/bumps.Transform 2: Not used.

F159 OddCuts.4This filter produces a series of notches in the frequency spectrum(based on the odd harmonic series), which turn into small bumpswhen morphed.Morph: Controls the depth of the notches/height of the bumps.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the notches/bumps.Transform 2: Not used.

F160 PWMtrans.4This filter produces a series of harmonically related notches,which become peaks as the filter is morphed upward — the effectcan be similar to pulse width modulation, depending on thesource material. As Frequency Tracking is moved upward, thepeaks/notches move toward the high end of the frequency range,and ‘Q’ is increased, producing more resonant sounds.Morph: Controls depth of the peaks/notches.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter and controls ‘Q’ amount.Transform 2: Not used.

F161 HiEndQ.4This filter behaves much like a resonant low-pass filter.Morph: Sweep this for low-pass filter effects.Freq. Tracking: Sets the initial cutoff point of the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 228: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual204

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

F162 BroadRes.4Sweeping filter for resonant effects. Can be used for a “waterdrop”effect on percussion.Morph: Sweeps to a series of peaks and notches. Notches: 80Hz,160Hz, 320Hz. Peaks: 2kHz, 6kHz, 10kHz.Freq. Tracking: Turns peaks into notches.Transform 2: Not used.

F163 RubberHose4This filter introduces a series of peaks spaced at octave intervals, inthe range of 95Hz to 1.5kHz, and a single notch at 47Hz. Increas-ing the Morph Offset further raises the peaks and lowers thenotch.Morph: Use to control the depth of the peaks/notch.Freq. Tracking: Higher values attenuate the effect of the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F164 HeeghCubeThis filter produces a very subtle series of peaks above 4kHz.Morphing increases the gain and bandwidth of the peaks, slightly,and Frequency Tracking can be used to subtly raise the frequencyof the peaks. Increasing the value for Transform 2 increases thegain of the peaks without affecting bandwidth.Morph: Controls gain and bandwidth of peaks.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Controls gain of peaks.

F165 NoizCubeThis filter introduces some subtle peaks into the high frequencyrange, along with a single peak which can be swept.Morph: Sweeps a single frequency.Freq. Tracking: Determines range of sweep.Transform 2: Tunes the sweep, bandwidth, and ‘Q’.

F166 VelctyTiltThis filter can function as a sweepable, subtle low-pass filter.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Control filter cutoff.Transform 2: Controls filter resonance.

F167 SynthWow4An emulation of a resonant low-pass filter. Both Morph Offset andFrequency Tracking control cutoff frequency; the brightest soundsare obtained with both these parameters set to 255.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Control filter cutoff.Transform 2: Not used.

Page 229: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 205

F168 CntrySweep4Multiple peaks are swept in a variety of directions, imparting aphase-shifter-like, almost vocal quality when this filter ismorphed.Morph: Set this higher to move widely spaced peaks closer to-gether.Freq. Tracking: Set this higher to move low-frequency peakstowards the higher ranges.Transform 2: Not used.

F169 Diffuser4Morphing this filter upward sweeps a resonant peak up in fre-quency and increases low frequency content. The FrequencyTracking parameter can be used to tune the peak.Morph: Use to tune the resonant peak and control low-frequencycontent.Freq. Tracking: Use to ‘tune’ the resonant peak and control low-frequency content.Transform 2: Not used.

F170 MdlySweep4Morphing this filter upward sweeps several resonant peaks up infrequency. The Frequency Tracking parameter can be used to tunethe peaks.Morph & Freq. Tracking: Tune the resonant peaks.Transform 2: Not used.

F171 StrongShimrThis filter produces several deep notches in the frequency spec-trum, which can be tuned or swept according to the settings andmodulators for the Morph Offset, Frequency Tracking, and Trans-form 2 parameters.Morph: Raising this value lowers the frequency of the notches,producing thinner sounds.Freq. Tracking: Raising this value lowers the frequency of thenotches, producing thinner sounds.Transform 2: Raising this value raises the frequency of thenotches, producing fatter sounds.

F172 Acc.Vel-1Morph: Fixes soft “Start-point”.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Velocity cube. Use Morph to establish soft start point.

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Page 230: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual206

F173 Acc.Vel-2Variation of “Acc.Vel-1”, except somewhat brighter on bottomand mellower on top.

F174 Vel2-WindMorph: Fixes soft “Start-point”.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Velocity cube. Use morph to establish soft start point.Good for wind instruments as more morph gives a “hollower” softsound.

F175 HarmoMorph: Changes from “peaky” lowpass response to smoothlowpass.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Controls volume, brightness and dissonance.Comments: Cube construction - Use the Aux. Envelope to provideattack transient which then fades off to rear frames.

F176 Start>EndAMorph: Complex peak at 80Hz to a very gentle lowpass response.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard bright-ness.Transform 2: Brighter, more volume, more harmonics.Comments: Cube construction - Use the Aux. Envelope to provideattack transient which then fades off to rear frames. Softer versionthan “HarmoEP”. Volume changes for sensitivity are maintainedin the cube.

F177 Start>EndBMorph: Flat response to gentle lowpass.Freq. Tracking: Key tracking to balance keyboard brightness.Transform 2: Controls volume, brightness and harmonic content.Comments: Same model as Start>EndA but more bright and disso-nant.

F178 MovingPick1Morph: Tight<>HollowFreq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to balance keyboard brightness.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Uses Morph to simulate acoustic versus electric typeresponse to velocity: plucking closer or further from the bridge ofa guitar for example.

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Page 231: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 207

F179 MovingPick2A variation on “MovingPick1” to simulate different pick positions,for example. Morph moves closer to neck, further from bridge.

F180 Mph+Trns1Morph: Makes vowel like changes.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to enhance vowel.Transform 2: Controls vowels, brightness, volume.Comments: Uses Morph to sweep from one vowel to another.Transform 2 takes care of velocity expression.

F181 0>OddsMorph: Sweeps from flat to odds only.Freq. Tracking: Provides key tracking to fix partials.Transform 2: Controls brightness and volume.Comments: Strong odds only spectrum with morphing. Transform2 takes care of brightness.

F182 Comb VoicesCenter frequencies of the poles and zeros in this filter can move inopposite directions as the filter is modulated along any of its axes,producing an amazing variety of possible curves. Sweeping theMorph axis produces some lovely phase-shifter/flanger-typeeffects, especially with the value for Transform 2 set fairly high.Morph: Use this to animate the comb-filtering effect.Freq. Tracking: Generally, this can be used to tune the filter.Transform 2: Moves the filter toward more open sounds.

F183 Odd-Ev HrmA series of peaks and notches based on the odd and even har-monic series. Sweeping the Morph axis produces some lovelycomb filtering effects, which can be either subtle or dramaticdepending on other settings ( especially that of Transform 2).Morph: Use this to sweep the peaks/notches.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Tunes the filter and controls resonance.

F184 OddHrm+rezThis filter cube, based on the odd harmonic series, provides anumber of comb-filtering effects. Use the Morph Offset to controlfilter ‘Q’, and Frequency Tracking and Transform 2 to tune thefilter.Morph: Increasing this parameter pushes the filter towards a flatcurve.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Tunes the filter. Higher values add a high-frequencybump.

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Page 232: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual208

F185 EvnHrm+rezThis filter cube is nearly identical to the ‘OddHrm+rez’ filter, butit’s based on the even harmonic series. The overall effect is quitesimilar, though somewhat less ‘hollow’ sound at certain settings.Morph: Increasing this parameter pushes the filter towards a flatcurve and reduced “Q”.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Tunes the filter. Higher values add a high-frequencybump.

F186 MellowPeaksThis filter provides two or three mildly resonant poles which canbe swept through the frequency spectrum in a number of ways,depending on the settings for the various parameters. With lowersettings for Frequency Tracking , the filter takes on a distinctlyvocal quality on most source material.Morph: Positive values generally move the poles upward in fre-quency.Freq. Tracking: Positive values generally move the poles upward infrequency.Transform 2: Positive values generally move the poles upward infrequency.

F187 AHmBnd.4The Morph Offset can be swept to sweep a cluster of resonantpeaks, producing a pitch-bend effect. The effect is generally mostpronounced with Frequency Tracking set to a fairly low value.Morph: Sweeping produces ‘pitch-bend’ effect.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Not used.

F188 VintageFeatures an accentuated low end, and a series of notches whichcan be swept via morphing. The most dramatic resonant sweepsare produced with Frequency Tracking set to minimum andTransform 2 set to maximum, producing the classic analog filtersweep sound.Morph: Use to sweep the filter.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Controls filter resonance.

F189 MildQPoleMorph: Sweeps between a shallow roll-off low-pass to almost flatresponse.Freq. Tracking: Tracks keyboard.Transform 2: At maximum, inverts morph effect.

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Page 233: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 209

F190 Bonk>COA series of highly resonant peaks alternating with notches arespaced at intervals of about an octave. The Morph Offset param-eter is used to control ‘Q’ — modulating the Morph Offset upwardcauses the curve to flatten out. Frequency Tracking can be used totune the peaks/notches; higher values move the peaks/notchesinto higher frequency ranges. Transform 2 also tunes the filter, buthigher values cause the notches to move down in frequency,slightly. The overall effect of the filter can be very vocal, depend-ing on the source material.Morph: Controls resonance.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Subtly tunes the filter.

F191 SpeakerGroups of unevenly spaced bumps and dips in the frequencyspectrum are used to simulate a number of speaker cabinet re-sponses. Use Morph Offset, Frequency Tracking, and Transform 2to vary the tuning and depth of the bumps and dips to simulatedifferent speaker cabinet types.All Axes: Vary center frequency and amount of boost/cut for thevarious filter bands.

F192 ExpanderFrequency Tracking and Transform 2 provide a range of fairlybroad-band boosts and cuts at various frequencies, with highervalues generally providing thinner, brighter sounds. These can beused to add a measure of expressiveness to the source material —route ‘Key’ to control Frequency Tracking, for example, and ‘Vel’to control Transform 2. Increasing the value for Morph Offset hasthe effect of flattening the curve, providing you with a filter depthcontrol.Morph: Use to control filter depth.Freq. Tracking: Higher values produce thinner, brighter sounds.Transform 2: Higher values produce thinner, brighter sounds.

F193 SeparatorThis filter features three inharmonically related resonant peaks,which can be swept via the Morph parameter, producing a metal-lic set of overtones. Applied to the noise waves, this can sound likewhistling wind; applied to pitch sounds, it can produce anythingfrom hollow, metallic resonances to accentuated high-frequencyattack transients.Morph: Use to sweep the resonant peaks.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Controls filter resonance.

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Page 234: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual210

F194 MildPolSwapBasically, a variable cut-off low pass filter.Morph: Tunes the filter.Freq. Tracking: Tunes the filter.Transform 2: Adds extra brightness to high morph.

DISTORTIONSJump Back! The Filter Level is useful to control the distortion filters.

F195 PoleCross.4Crossing poles produces certain “hot” or “sweet” spots wherefrequencies correlate.Morph: Crosses filter “poles” to create hot (distortion) or sweetspots.Freq. Tracking: Adds extra bite to Morph.Transform 2: Not used.

F196 ApDistB6.4Reducing the Filter Level parameter in the preset will not onlyreduce the volume level, it will also reduce the amount of distor-tion effect. Therefore, routing velocity, mod wheel, pressure,pedal, etc to Filter Level controls the distortion’s depth as well asvolume.

F197 TubeJam.4All rules are broken here. Peaks are intentionally clipped, yetoutput volume is within tolerance....barely! Only the morph axisis active.Freq. Tracking: Not used.Transform 2: Not used.

Z-PLANE FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Page 235: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 211

LOOP OFFSET SAMPLE LOCATIONS

This listing represents the actual order of the ROM samples inmemory. This information may be useful when adjusting the LoopOffset parameters in the preset menu. When the loop size reaches theend of memory, it jumps back to the start.

- Start -Big Brass - G1Big Brass - C6KenongElec. Bass 1Elec. Bass 2Emu Bass - B2Saint MoogGuitarMoog - A1DX7 - D2Killer 808Snare DrumSnare 2Distorto-KickBeef Rap KickSnap SnareSuper High Hip SnareBass DrumOrchestral Wimp SnareCrisp SnareRim ShotHip HatHi-HatOhhKickin’ 808TR808 SnareShakerClosed Hi-HatOpen Hi-HatCowbellHi-HatTambourineChikWahmuteTR909 Dry Bass DrumElectroclaveKick1 909Snare1 909Rubber 909 BassSnare 3 909Power Ambient KickSnare 2Ware Snare 2Bock Clave 3Click 3

Acoustic Guitar - B5Acoustic Guitar - E6Sax - G1Sax - A1Sax - C2Sax - E2Sax - G2Sax - A2Sax - C3Sax - D3Sax - F3Sax - A3Sax - C4CZ Bass 1CZ Bass 2ResonBassSilkworm - A3ClusterTowel RackSolder -SuckerWood RaspIron RattleNoise BurstVise-GripMetal StringGutt BassGutt BassUpright BassFretless BassFretless BassFretless BassQuick BassQuick BassQuick BassCool VibeCool VibeBright VibesBright VibesVibe StickCrotales D5PekingIron SaronIron SaronSheppard ToneIcy Pad 1Icy Pad 2

Conga ToneTumba ToneConga Slap ClosedConga Slap OpenConga SlapBass DrumQuake Bass - C2 loopBright Tip HatFoot HatBig Open Hat 2Noise HatSuper Bird CymbalShamen Snare Drum 1Shamen Snare Drum 2Shamen Snare Drum 3Electric BassTR909 Dry Bass Drum 1TR909 Dry Closed HatTR909 Dry Open HatTR909 Dry ClapTR808 Dry Clap 2TR808 Dry SnareTR808 Dry Rim 1TR808 Dry ShakerDanceraDancera HiTR707 TambourineBig Brass - F2Big Brass - D4Spectrum PadSpectrum PadJupiter 8Orchestral String 2StringsStringsSyn StringStrings - F3Strings - C4Strings - F4Orchestral String 1Orchestral String 1TR808 Kick 2Acoustic Guitar - E1Acoustic Guitar - A2Acoustic Guitar - D3Acoustic Guitar - G4

Page 236: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual212

LOOP OFFSET SAMPLE LOCATIONS

Bright Electric Piano 1Bright Electric Piano 2Bosendorfer - D1Bosendorfer - F1Bosendorfer - C2Bosendorfer - F2Bosendorfer - B2Moog Wave 1Moog Wave 2Moog Wave 3Resonate BassBosendorfer - E3Bass-O-DropKickin’ 808Bosendorfer - G3Bosendorfer - D4Bosendorfer - G4Bosendorfer - C5Bosendorfer - F5Bosendorfer - A5Bosendorfer - D6Bosendorfer - F6Fretless BassRock Organ - A5Electric Guitar - E1Electric Guitar - D2Electric Guitar - G2Electric Guitar - B2Electric Guitar - E3Electric Guitar - A3Electric Guitar - E1Bass Harmonic - E1Bass Harmonic - A2Bass Harmonic - D3Bass Harmonic - G4Guitar HarmonicGuitar Low EBridge Pickup - EBridge Sample - GBridge Sample - ABridge Sample - CBridge Sample - EA-String OctaveD-String OctaveG-StringFretless BassOpen E String - PickupLow E StringOpen A String - 2 PickupsLow E String - PickupHigh & Low E StringBridge - E2

Pulse 94% - C2Pulse 94% - F2Pulse 94% - B2Pulse 94% - E3Pulse 94% - A3Pulse 94% - D4Pulse 94% - G4Pulse 94% - C5Pulse 94% - F5Pulse 96% - F0Pulse 96% - A0Pulse 96% - D1Pulse 96% - G1Pulse 96% - C2Pulse 96% - F2Pulse 96% - B2Pulse 96% - E3Pulse 96% - A3Square WaveSquare WaveSquare WavePulse 96% - D4Pulse 96% - G4Pulse 96% - C5Pulse 96% - F5Pulse 98% - C0Pulse 98% - F0Pulse 98% - A0Pulse 98% - D1Pulse 98% - G1Pulse 98% - C2Pulse 98% - F2Pulse 98% - B2Pulse 98% - E3Pulse 98% - A3Pulse 98% - D4Pulse 98% - G4Pulse 98% - C5Pulse 98% - F5Pulse 99% - C0Pulse 99% - F0Pulse 99% - A0Pulse 99% - D1Pulse 99% - G1Pulse 99% - C2Pulse 99% - F2Pulse 99% - B2Pulse 99% - E3Pulse 99% - A3Pulse 99% - D4Pulse 99% - G4Pulse 99% - C5

Straight Saw 1Straight Saw 2Straight Saw 3Straight Saw 4Big Saw - High AHighest SawPulse 50% - C0Pulse 50% - F0Pulse 50% - A0Pulse 50% - G1Pulse 50% - C2Pulse 50% - F2Pulse 50% - B2Pulse 50% - E3Pulse 50% - A3Pulse 50% - D4Pulse 50% - G4Pulse 50% - C5Pulse 50% - F5Pulse 75% - C0Pulse 75% - F0Pulse 75% - A0Pulse 75% - D1Pulse 75% - G1Pulse 75% - C2Pulse 75% - F2Pulse 75% - B2Pulse 75% - E3Pulse 75% - A3Pulse 75% - D4Pulse 75% - G4Pulse 75% - C5Pulse 75% - F5Pulse 90% - C0Pulse 90% - F0Pulse 90% - A0Pulse 90% - D1Pulse 90% - G1Pulse 90% - C2Pulse 90% - F2Pulse 90% - B2Pulse 90% - E3Pulse 90% - A3Pulse 90% - D4Pulse 90% - G4Pulse 90% - C5Pulse 90% - F5Pulse 94% - C0Pulse 94% - F0Pulse 94% - A0Pulse 94% - D1Pulse 94% - G1

Page 237: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 213

LOOP OFFSET SAMPLE LOCATIONS

Pulse 99% - F5Noise3rd Octave White NoiseTriangle - D4Triangle - D5Triangle - D7Octave 1 SineOctave 2 AllOctave 3 AllOctave 4 AllOctave 5 AllOctave 6 AllOctave 7 AllOctave 3 OddOctave 4 OddOctave 5 OddOctave 6 OddOctave 7 OddOdd 1Even 1Octave1B3 Wave 1B3 Wave 2B3 Wave 4B3 Wave 5B3 Wave 6Organ 1Organ 2Color OrganSynth Cycle - C1Synth Cycle - C2Synth Cycle - C3Synth Cycle - C4Fundamental Gone 1Fundamental Gone 2Bite CycleBuzzy CycleMetalphone 1Metalphone 2Metalphone 3Metalphone 4Duck Cycle 1Duck Cycle 2Duck Cycle 3Wind Cycle 1Wind Cycle 2Wind Cycle 3Wind Cycle 4Organ Cycle 2Violin Essence - B2Violin Essence - A3Violin Essence - C4

Violin Essence - C5Buzzoon - A3Buzzoon - A6Brassy Wave - A3Brassy Wave - A4Brassy Wave - A5Woofer PulseReedy BuzzReedy Buzz 2Mini MoogChoir 1Reedy Buzz 3Choir 2Growl Wave 1Growl Wave 1Growl Wave 1Harpsiwave - A2Harpsiwave - A4Fuzzy Gruzz - A2Fuzzy Gruzz - A4Acoustic Guitar WavePower Fifths - A2Power Fifths - G2Power Fifths - C3Power Fifths - F3Power Fifths - A3Metal Whisper 1Hollow Whisper 1Metal Whisper 2Hollow Whisper 2Formant AxeJX Sync 1JX Sync 2Lead SweepPulse Sweep 1Pulse Sweep 2Pulse Sweep 3E-mu ModularMoog Rectangle 1 - G3Moog Rectangle 1 - G5Moog Rectangle 1 - C6Moog Rectangle 2 - G3Moog Rectangle 2 - G5Moog Rectangle 2 - C6Moog Rectangle 3 - G3Moog Rectangle 3 - G5Moog Rectangle 3 - C6Moog Rectangle 4 - G3Moog Rectangle 4 - G5Moog Rectangle 4 - C6Moog Rectangle 5 - G3Moog Rectangle 5 - G5

Moog Rectangle 5 -C6Ring Mod WaveIce Bell 1Ice Bell 2Ice Bell 3Bronze Age - E3Bronze Age - E6Iron Plate - D4Iron Plate - D6AluminumLead BeamSteel Extract - A4Steel Extract - A6Winter Glass 1Winter Glass 2Winter Glass 3Winter Glass 4SE SynthesisTrumpet Wave 1Trumpet Wave 1Trumpet Wave 1Trumpet Wave 1Trumpet Wave 1Trumpet Wave 2Trumpet Wave 2Record Scratch 1Upright Bass 1Upright Bass 2Upright Bass 2Minimoog Lead 1Minimoog Lead 2Minimoog Lead 3Rhodes 1Rhodes 2Hollow WashClusterSwirlyPink NoiseMellow PadStringsRecord Scratch 2Record Scratch 3Record Scratch 4Record Scratch 5Record Scratch 6Record Scratch 7Scratch 1MechavoxFiltered SawOctave 5 All- End -

Page 238: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual214

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Linear Exponential +1

Exponential +2 Exponential +3

Exponential +4 Exponential +5

Exponential +6 Exponential +7

Page 239: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 215

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Circle 1.4 Circle 1.6

Circle 1.8 Circle 1.16

Squeeze Fast Line 1

Fast Line 2 Fast Line 3

Page 240: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual216

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Medium Line 1 Medium Line 2

Slow Ramp 1 Slow Ramp 2

Bloom Bloom 2

Circle 1.16 R Circle 1.8 R

Page 241: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 217

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Circle 1.16 R Circle 1.4 R

Slow Curve 1 Slow Curve 2

DC DelayDelay DC

Curve 2x Curve 2x B

••• Delay DC waits for thespecified time, then outputsthe level.

••• DC Delay outputs thelevel, then waits for thespecified time before movingon to the next segment.

These two shapes are usefulfor creating stepped mini-sequences.

Page 242: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual218

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Curve 2x C Ziz-Zag 1

Ziz-Zag 2 Ziz-Zag 3

Chaos 03 Chaos 06

Chaos 12 Chaos 16

Page 243: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 219

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Chaos 25 Chaos 33

Chaos 37 Chaos 50

Chaos 66 Chaos 75

Chaos 95 Chaos 99

Page 244: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual220

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Linear Shuffle Linear Shuffle 2

Random BRandom A

Random C Random D

Random E Random F

Page 245: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 221

FUNCTION GENERATOR CURVES

Random G Random H

Random I Random J

Random K Random L

Random Z

Page 246: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual222

FUNCTION GENERATOR, LFO & ENVELOPE SPECIFICATIONS

••• The Pitch Intervals canbe used when modulatingPitch. All other attenuatorsshould be set to +127.Multiple “patch cords” canbe added For greater pitchintervals.

DELAY TIMES

148

163236485688

100116127

.02

.10

.18

.38

.891.051.612.065.026.779.94

12.85

Display Time (secs)

LFOPITCH INTERVALS

326598

127127+36127+69

127+101

123456

<7

Display Semitone

LFO RATES

0005

101520253040506080

127

.052.1.6.8

1.331.82.23.37

101625

Display Rate (Hz)

FUNCTION GEN.PITCH INTERVALS

+16+32+49+65+81+97

+113+127

1234567

<8

Display Semitone

ENVELOPE RATES

481624324860768896100127

.066

.090

.174

.246

.4081.042.065.059.8715.5619.64163.6

Display Rate (secs)

Page 247: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 223

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Audio Channels: ............................ 32

Audio Outputs: .............................. 6 (2 main, 2 effects, 2 submix)

Submix Inputs: .............................. 4

Max. Output Level: ....................... +4 dB into 600Ω

Output Impedance: ...................... 1kΩ

MIDI: ................................................ In, Out, Thru

Data Encoding: .............................. 16 bit Linear

Sample Playback Rate: ................ 39 kHz

Max. Signal to Quiescent Noise: >90 dB

Dynamic Range: ............................ >90 dB

Frequency Response: .................... 20 Hz-15 kHz

THD +N: ........................................... <.05%

IMD: .................................................. <.05%

Stereo Phase: .................................. Phase Coherent ±1˚ at 1 kHz

MIDI Response Time: ................... < 4 mS

Filter: ................................................ (32) 14-pole Z-Plane Filters(32) LP Tone Filters

Power Requirements: .................. 25 watts

Dimensions: .................................... H: 1.75" W: 19" L: 8.5"

Weight: ............................................ 6 lb, 14 oz (3.1 Kg)

Page 248: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual224

MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

BasicChannel

DefaultChanged

Mode DefaultMessages

NoteNumber True Voice

Velocity Note ONNote OFF

AfterTouch

KeysChannels

Pitch Bender

Control Change

ProgramChange True Number

System Exclusive

SystemCommon

:Song Pos:Song Sel:Tune

SystemReal Time

:Clock:Commands

AuxMessages

:Local On/Off:Active Sense:Reset

NoNo

11-16

Memorized

No Mode 1, 3, 4MONO, POLYOMNI, ON/OFF

Memorized

NoNo

0-1270-127

NoNo

YesNo

v=1-127

NoNo

YesYes

No Yes

No Yes

NoNo

Yes 0-127Yes 0-127

Yes Yes

NoNoNo

NoNoNo

NoNo

NoNo

NoNoNo

NoNoNo

Notes: Pan 0=hard left 127=hard right

Function…

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLYMode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONOMode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

0-31

Bank Select No Yes

64-79

All Sound Off

Reset All Controllers

No Yes

No Yes

All Notes Off No Yes

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR MORPHEUS SYSEX• Product ID for Morpheus is 0C.

• Device ID is [00-0F] (0-15 decimal).

• Parameter Number and Parameter Value are 2 bytes each.

• Since MIDI data bytes cannot be greater than [7F] (127 decimal), thedata values are “nibble-ized” to a 14-bit signed 2's complement format.

• There is one edit buffer for the current preset (the preset shown inthe display), one for the hyperpreset, and one for the midimap (thecurrent midimap). Only one preset, hyper or midimap can be edited ata time via SysEx commands and changing the current preset, hyper ormidimap erases the associated edit buffer.

Page 249: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 225

MIDI SPECIFICATION

RECEIVED CHANNEL COMMANDSChannels number (n) = 0-15. Message bytes are represented in hex. Allother numbers are decimal. Running Status is supported.

Command Message CommentsNote Off 8n kk vv release velocity is ignored

Note On 9n kk vv velocity 0 = note off

Key Aftertouch An kk vv kk = 0-127 vv = 0-127

Program Change Cn vv 0-127

Channel Aftertouch Dn vv 0-127

Pitch Bend En ll mm l = lsb, m = msb

Realtime Controller Bn cc vv cc = 00-31

Footswitch Bn cc vv cc = 64-79, vv ≥ 64 = on

Volume Bn 07 vv 0-127

Pan Bn 0A vv 0 = hard left, 127 = hard right

All Sound Off Bn 78 00 turns all sound off

Reset All Controllers Bn 79 00 ignored in omni mode

All Notes Off Bn 7B 00 ignored in omni mode

Omni Mode Off* Bn 7C 00 forces all notes & controls off

Omni Mode On* Bn 7D 00 forces all notes & controls off

Mono Mode On (Poly Off)*Bn 7E 00 forces all notes & controls off

Poly Mode On (Mono Off)*Bn 7F 00 forces all notes & controls off

Bank Select Bn 00 00 20 bb Cn pp bb = bank #

pp = program in bank

* Special Notes:From Omni Mode ... Omni Off turns Poly On.From Poly Mode ..... Omni On turns Omni On; Mono On turns Mono On.From Mono Mode ... Mono Off turns Poly On; Omni On turns Omni On.From Multi Mode ... Omni On turns Omni On; Omni Off or Mono OffturnsPoly On; Mono On turns Mono On.All other changes have no effect.

Page 250: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual226

MIDI SPECIFICATION

MIDI SYSEX COMMANDSFor system exclusive commands, the following format is used:

F0 System Exclusive Status Byte18 E-mu ID Byte0C Product ID Byte (will also respond to ID 04 - Proteus)dd Device ID Bytecc Command Byte... Data BytesF7 EOX

SysEx EditingPreset and setup parameters may be edited individually using systemexclusive commands. The preset being edited is the active preset (thepreset on the basic or global channel and the one which is shown in theLCD). The value of a given parameter may be changed by sending aparameter value command. The value of a parameter may be read bysending a parameter value request, to which the machine will respond bysending back the parameter value. Please note that there is only oneedit buffer

All SysEx bytes are displayed in Hex, unless specified other-wise. All comment numbers are displayed in decimal, unlessspecified otherwise.

Two MIDI bytes (lsb, msb) are required for each 14 bit data word. Bits 0-6 are sent first, followed by bits 7-13 in the next MIDI byte. All datawords are signed 2's complement values with sign-extension out to themost significant bit (bit 13). This convention applies to all data words,regardless of the parameter's value range.

Preset data may also be transmitted or received in a single block (onecomplete preset) using system exclusive commands. A preset data requestmay be issued by a host computer, to which the machine will respondsending the data block for the requested preset. Conversely, the com-puter may send new preset data which will replace the specified presetcurrently in the machine. Additionally, a front panel command willtransmit one or all user presets for backup onto an external sequencer.These presets may be restored by simply playing back the sequence intothe machine.

Warning: When transferring preset banks and tuning table data backand forth from Morpheus to a computer, the data should be recorded asyou would a regular sequence. Sending the data in one huge chunk willclog the input buffer on Morpheus unless a time period of approxi-mately 100 mS is inserted between each preset. The SysEx Packet Delayfeature in the Master menu can be used to slow down the data ratewhen the computer's input buffer is being clogged.

••• Morpheus will receiveProteus presets (if enabled inthe Master menu), but will fillin the extra parameters withdefault values and setinstruments to “None”.

There is only one editbuffer each for the currentpreset, the currenthyperpreset, and the currentmidimap.

Only one preset, hyperpresetor midimap can be edited ata time via SysEx commandsand changing the currentpreset, hyper or midimaperases the associated editbuffer.

Page 251: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 227

MIDI SPECIFICATION

COMMAND SUMMARYThe following SysEx Command IDs are recognized by Morpheus.

Command FunctionNumber

00 Preset Request

01 Preset Data

02 Parameter Request

03 Parameter Data

04 Tune Table Request

05 Tune Table Data

06 Prog Map Request

07 Prog Map Data

08 Master Data Request

.. Unused

0A Version Request

0B Version Data

0C Configuration Request

0D Configuration Data

0E Instrument List Request

0F Instrument List Data

.. Unused

12 Preset List Request

13 Preset List Data

.. Unused

44 Hyperpreset Request

45 Hyperpreset Data

46 Midimap Request

47 Midimap Data

.. Unused

50 Hyperpreset List Req

51 Hyperpreset List Data

52 Midimap List Req

53 Midimap List Data

54 Effect List Req

55 Effect List Data

56 Filter List Req

57 Filter List Data

Page 252: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual228

MIDI SPECIFICATION

COMMAND DETAILSAll parameters are sent as 14-bit signed values, LSB-MSB. (See discussionof number conversion) numbers in the far left column are decimaloffsets into the dumps.These numbers are added to the parm baseoffsets in order to do individual parameter editing. (See PARAMETERediting cmds) Data sent to a ROM card or a card that is protected isignored. Requests for card data while card is not inserted will be ig-nored. Removing the card while a dump involving card data is inprogress can cause unexpected results. (Generally, default data will besent. no data corruption in the box should occur.)

PRESET REQUESTRequest preset. Uses preset index values (not the same as programnumbers). Request for card presets will be ignored if card is notpresent. Preset numbers are: 0-127 RAM, 128-255 ROM, 256-319CARD. Values 0x0400+ the bank number (0-2) represent request forbanks. (Banks are blocks of 128 presets.)

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1500 Command IDll lsb Preset Numbermm msb Preset NumberF7 End of SysEx Status

PRESET DATAVersion 0x01 format is as follows:

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1501 Command ID - Preset Datavv Preset Data Versionll ls byte Preset Numbermm ms byte Preset Number

Page 253: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 229

MIDI SPECIFICATION

Offset Name Range0 Preset Name 12 chars, ASCII 32-12712 Preset Low Key 0-127 MIDI key number13 Preset Hi Key 0-127 MIDI key number14 Bend Range 0-13, ± 0-12 semitones, 13 = Global15 Velocity Curve 0-5, 0 = Off, 5 = Global16 Keyboard Center 0-127 MIDI key number17 Tune Table 0-5, Equal, Just C, Vallotti,

19-Tone, Gamelan, User18 Mix Bus 0-3, Main, Sub1, FXA, FXB19 Port Mode 0-5, Mono, Poly 1-5 keys20 X-Fade Mode 0-2, Off, XFade, XSwitch21 X-Fade Direction 0-1, Pri->Sec, Sec->Pri22 X-Fade Balance 0-12723 X-Fade Amount 0-25524 X-Switch Pointt 0-127, MIDI key number or velocity25 Note-on Source See PATCHCORDS SRC26 Note-on Dest. See PATCHCORDS SRC27 Note-on Amount -128 to +127

... 10 note-on cords (3 parms each)55 Realtime Source See PATCHCORDS DEST56 Realtime Dest. See PATCHCORDS DEST57 Realtime Amount -128 to +127

... 10 realtime cords (3 parms each)85 Foot Dest. See PATCHCORDS DEST

... 3 footswitch cords (1 parm each)88 Ctrl. A Amount -128 to +12789 Ctrl B Amount -128 to +12790 Ctrl C Amount -128 to +12791 Ctrl D Amount -128 to +12792 Pressure Amount -128 to +12793 LFO Shape 0-4, Rand, Tri, Sine, Saw, Square94 LFO Rate 0-12795 LFO Delay 0-12796 LFO Variation 0-12797 LFO Amount -128 to +127

... 2 LFOs (5 parms each)103 FG Amount -128 to +127104 FG Seg Level See FUNCGEN LEVELS105 FG Seg Time 0-4095 msecs

The parameter numbersshown at right must beadded to the Preset Param-eter Base value (8192 forpreset parms) in order toaccess individual parameters.

Page 254: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual230

MIDI SPECIFICATION

Offset Name Range106 FG Seg Shape See FUNCGEN SHAPES chart107 FG Seg CondJump See FUNCGEN CONDITIONS chart108 FG Seg CondVal ± 127109 FG Seg DestSeg 0-7 segment number

... 8 funcgen segments-6 parms each

... 2 function generators-49 parms each201 Aux Env Delay 0-127202 Aux Env Attack 0-99 rate203 Aux Env Hold 0-99 time204 Aux Env Decay 0-99 rate205 Aux Env Sustain 0-99 level206 Aux Env Release 0-99 rate207 Aux Env Amount -128 to +127208 Layer Instrument See INSTRUMENT NUMBERS209 (L) Low Key 0-127 MIDI key number210 (L) Hi Key 0-127 MIDI key number211 (L) Volume 0-127212 (L) Pan -7 to +7213 (L) Course Tune ± 36 semitones214 (L) Key Xpose ± 36 semitones215 (L) Fine Tune ± 64 semitone/64216 (L) AltEnv Enable 0-1, Off, On217 (L) AltEnv Attack 0-99 rate218 (L) AltEnv Hold 0-99 time219 (L) AltEnv Decay 0-99 rate220 (L) AltEnv Sustain 0-99 level221 (L) AltEnv Release 0-99 rate222 (L) Loop Enable 0-1, Off, On223 (L) LoopStart MS ± 999 thousand samples224 (L) LoopStart LS ± 999 samples225 (L) LpSizeOff MS ± 999 thousand samples226 (L) LpSizeOff LS ± 999 samples227 (L) Sound Start 0-127228 (L) Sound Delay 0-127229 (L) Solo Mode 0-2, Off, Wind, Synth230 (L) Solo Priority 0-4, Hi, Low, First, Last, Drum231 (L) Portamento Rate 0-127, 0 = Off232 (L) Pmento Shape 0-8, 0 = Linear, Expo1 - Expo8

••• The Parameters labeledwith (L) are the primarylayer. The secondary layerparameters bigin at number243.

Page 255: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 231

MIDI SPECIFICATION

••• The Parameters labeledwith (L) are the primarylayer. The secondary layerparameters bigin at number243.

Offset Name Range233 (L) Double+Detune 0-15, 0 = Off234 (L) Sound Reverse 0-1, Off, On235 (L) Nontranspose 0-1, Off, On236 (L) Filt Type See FILTER TYPES237 (L) Filt Reverse 0-1, Off, On238 (L) Filt Level 0-255239 (L) Filt Morph 0-255240 (L) Filt FrqTrk 0-255241 (L) Filt Trans2 0-255242 (L) Unused 0(L) = Layer ... 2 layers (35 parms each)

cs ChecksumF7 End of SysEx Status

• Hyperpreset RequestRequest Hyper uses index values (not the same as program numbers).Request for RAM Card presets will be ignored if card is not present.Hyperpreset numbers are: 0-127 RAM, 128-255 CARD. Values 0x0400+ bank # represent request for banks. (Banks are blocks of 128 Hypers.)

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1544 Command IDll Hyperpreset Number ls bytemm Hyperpreset Number ms byteF7 End of SysEx Status

• Hyperpreset DataVersion 0x01 format is as follows:

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1545 Command IDvv Data Versionll ls Byte Hyperpreset Numbermm ms Byte Hyperpreset Number

Page 256: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual232

MIDI SPECIFICATION

••• The parameters labeledwith (Z) equate to zone 1.Zones 2-16 begin at param-eter number 72.

No. Name Range0 Hyperpreset Name 12 chars, ASCII 32-12712 Port Mode 0-5, Mono, Poly 1-5 keys13 FG Seg Level See FUNCGEN LEVELS14 FG Seg Time 0-4095 msecs15 FG Seg Shape See FUNCGEN SHAPES16 FG Seg CondJump See FUNCGEN CONDITIONS17 FG Seg CondVal ± 12718 FG Seg DestSeg 0-7 segment number

... 8 funcgen segments (6 parms each)61 Z Preset -1 = None, 0-MAX PRESET62 Z Volume 0-12763 Z Pan ± 1464 Z Low Key 0-127 MIDI key number65 Z High Key 0-127 MIDI key number66 Z Low Vel 0-12767 Z High Vel 0-12768 Z Vel Offset ± 12669 Z Xpose ± 36 keys70 Z Coarse Tune ± 36 semitones71 Z Fine Tune ± 64 semitones/64Z = zone ... 16 zones (11 parms each)

cs ChecksumF7 End of SysEx Status

• Midimap RequestRequest midimap. Request for card midimaps will be ignored if card isnot present. Midimap numbers: 0-15 RAM, 16-31 CARD. Values0x0400 + bank number (0-1) represent requests for banks. (Banks areblocks of 16 Midimaps) The scratch map is accessed by requestingMASTER settings or individual parameter requests.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1546 Command IDml ls byte Midimap Numbermb ms byte Midimap NumberF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 257: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 233

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Midimap DataVersion 01 of the midimap follows. If map is sent to current selectedlocation, the scratch map will be loaded from the newly stored map.Midimap numbers: 0-15 RAM, 16-31 CARD

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1547 Command IDvv Data Versionll Midimap Number ls bytemm Midimap Number ms byte

Offset Name Range0 Midimap Name 12 chars, ASCII 32-12712 Ch. Program See PROGRAM NUMBERS13 Ch. Bank 0-4, See PROG. NUMBERS for bank #s14 Ch. Volume 0-12715 Ch. Pan ± 7, -8 = Preset16 Ch. Mix Bus -1 = preset, 0-3 Main, Sub1, FxA, FxB17 Ch. Enable 0-1, Off, On18 Ch. ProgChg Enbl 0-1, Off, On19 Ch. BankChg Enbl 0-1, Off, On20 Ch. VolCtl Enbl 0-1, Off, On21 Ch. PanCtl Enbl 0-1, Off, On22 Ch. PWhl Enbl 0-1, Off, On23 Ch. MPress Enbl 0-1, Off, On24 Ch. PPress Enbl 0-1, Off, On25 Ch. Ctl. A Enbl 0-1, Off, On26 Ch. Ctl. B Enbl 0-1, Off, On27 Ch. Ctl. C Enbl 0-1, Off, On28 Ch. Ctl. D Enbl 0-1, Off, On29 Ch. Ftsw. 1 Enbl 0-1, Off, On30 Ch. Ftsw. 2 Enbl 0-1, Off, On31 Ch. Ftsw. 3 Enbl 0-1, Off, On... for 16 channels (20 parms each)332 Prog Map -1 for None, 0-3333 FX A Type See EFFECTS TYPES334 FX A Parm Vals See EFFECTS TYPES

Page 258: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual234

MIDI SPECIFICATION

Offset Name Range... 10 parm values344 FX B Type See EFFECTS TYPES chart345 FX B Parm Vals See EFFECTS TYPES chart... 10 parm values355 FX A Amt 0-100%356 FX B Amt 0-100%357 B->A Amt 0-100%, 101 = B->A Only358 FX A Bus 0-2, Main, Sub1, Sub2359 FX B Bus 0-2, Main, Sub1, Sub2

cs ChecksumF7 End of SysEx Status

• Parameter RequestRequest a parameter value. An unknown parameter number willrespond with a value of zero. Individual parameter editing uses aunique parm number for each editable parm. See PARAMETER NUM-BERS chart for a listing of the parameters.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1502 Command IDpl Parm Number ls bytepm Parm Number ms byteF7 End of SysEx Status

• Parameter DataThe format of a parameter value request response is as follows.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1503 Command IDpl Parm Number ls bytepm Parm Number ms bytevl Parm Value ls bytevm Parm Value ms byteF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 259: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 235

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Tuning Table Request

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1504 Command IDbb Table Number, 0 - MAX TUNETABLEF7 End of SysEx Status

• Tuning Table Data

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1505 Command IDbb Table Number (only 1 table in Morpheus)ll ls byte of Tune Valuemm ms byte of Tune Value... 128 total entriesF7 End of SysEx Status

• Program Map Request

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1506 Command IDbb Map Number, 0-3F7 End of SysEx Status

Page 260: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual236

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Program Map Data

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1507 Command IDbb Map Number, 0-3ll ls byte of Program Numbermm ms byte of Program Number... 128 total entriesF7 End of SysEx Status

• Master Settings Request

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1508 Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

• Master Settings DataA master settings request responds with streams of parmnumber/parmvalue pairs in running status mode. Two separate dumps are sent:first global parms, then scratch midimap parms.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1503 Command IDpl lsb Parm Numberpm msb Parm Numbervl lsb Parm Valuevm msb Parm Value... Global Parms

Page 261: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 237

MIDI SPECIFICATION

F7 End of SysEx Statusthen...F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1503 Command IDpl lsb Parm Numberpm msb Parm Numbervl lsb Parm Valuevm msb Parm Value... Scratch Midimap ParmsF7 End of SysEx Status

• Version RequestUse this command to determine the model (version code) and thesoftware revision. different models and revisions may have more orless features, so use the command to verify what machine is beingcontrolled.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150A Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

• Version Data

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150B Command ID02 Version Code for Morpheusr1 Revision x.xx (i.e. 1.00)r2r2F7 End of SysEx Status

Page 262: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual238

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Configuration RequestUse this command to get configuration information. Note that muchof the information is dynamic (e.g. if RAM card is installed or not) andtherefore the information is only valid for some window of time. Thiscommand can be used to determine if a card is presently installed.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150C Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

• Configuration DataSee the Request Command Description for information regarding the validityof this information.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150D Command IDpl lsb Number of Presetspm msb Number of Presetss1 Sound Set Rank Asl lsb Number of Insts Rank Asm msb Number of Insts Rank As2 Sound Set Rank Bsl lsb Number of Insts Rank Bsm msb Number of Insts Rank Bhl lsb Number of Hyperpresetshm msb Number of Hyperpresetshl lsb Number of Filtershm msb Number of Filtersml lsb Number of Midimapsmm msb Number of Midimapsel lsb Number of A Effectsem msb Number of A Effectsel lsb Number of B Effectsem msb Number of B EffectsF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 263: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 239

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Instrument List RequestRequest list of available instruments. See data message for format ofresponse.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150E Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

• Instrument List DataList of currently available instruments and their ids in the order theyappear in the box. See INSTRUMENT NUMBERS for a description of theinstrument number.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150F Command IDnl lsb Number of Instrumentsnm msb Number of Instrumentsil lsb Instrument Numberim msb Instrument Numbernn Instrument Name... 11 ASCII Chars per Instrument00 String Null Terminator... for number of instrumentsF7 End of SysEx Status

• Filter List RequestRequest list of available filters. See data message for format of response.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1556 Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 264: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual240

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Filter List DataList of currently available filters and their ids in the order they appearin the box. See FILTER TYPES for information regarding interpretation ofthis data.

F0 SysEx StatusByte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1557 Command IDnl lsb Number of Filtersnm msb Number of Filtersil lsb Filter Numberim msb Filter Numbernn Filter Name... 11 ASCII chars per instrument00 String Null Terminatortl lsb of Transform Numbertm msb of Transform Number... for number of filtersF7 End of SysEx Status

• Preset List RequestRequest list of available presets. See data message for format.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1512 Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 265: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 241

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Preset List DataList of currently available presets in the order they appear in Morpheus.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-150F Command IDnl lsb Number of Presetsnm msb Number of Presetsnn Preset Name... 12 ASCII chars per instrument00 String Null Terminator... for number of presetsF7 End of SysEx Status

• Hyperpreset List RequestRequest list of available Hypers. See data message for format of response.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1550 Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

• Hyperpreset List DataCurrently available Hypers in the order they appear in Morpheus.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1551 Command IDnl lsb Number of Hyperpresetsnm msb Number of Hyperpresetsnn Hyperpreset Name... 12 ASCII Chars per Hyperpreset00 String Null Terminator... for number of HyperpresetsF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 266: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual242

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Midimap List RequestRequest list of available midimaps. See the data message for the format ofthe response.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1552 Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

• Midimap List DataList of currently available midimaps in the order as they appear inMorpheus.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1553 Command IDnl lsb Number of Midimapsnm msb Number of Midimapsnn Midimap Name... 12 ASCII Chars per Midimap00 String Null Terminator... for number of MidimapF7 End of SysEx Status

• Effect List RequestRequest list of available effects. See the data message for the format of theresponse.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1554 Command IDF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 267: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 243

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Effect List DataList of currently available effects and their ids in the order they appearin the box. See EFFECT TYPES for information regarding the interpretationof this data.

F0 SysEx Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product IDdd Device ID 0-1555 Command IDnl lsb Number of A Effectsnm msb Number of A Effectsil lsb Effect IDim msb Effect IDnn Effect Name... 12 ASCII Chars per Effect00 String Null Terminatorpl lsb Effect Number of Parmspm msb Effect Number of Parmsnn Effect Parm Name... 11 ASCII Chars per Effect Parm00 String Null Terminatorvl lsb Parm Min Valuevm msb Parm Min Valuevl lsb Parm Max Valuevm msb Parm Max Valuevl lsb Parm Default Valuevm msb Parm Default Value... for number of parms for each effectnl lsb Number of B Effectsnm msb Number of B Effects... same format as for A Effect ListF7 End of SysEx Status

Page 268: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual244

MIDI SPECIFICATION

MISCELLANEOUS DOCUMENTATION

• Patchcord SourcesThe MIDI patchcord sources are unique across all Proteus type prod-ucts. The note-on patchcords, valid for Morpheus, are as follows:

MIDI DescriptionValue0 Key1 Velocity2 Pitchwheel3 Control A4 Control B5 Control C6 Control D7 Mono Pressure8 Free-run Function Generator

The realtime patchcord sources, valid for Morpheus, are as follows:

MIDI DescriptionValue0 Pitchwheel1 Control A2 Control B3 Control C4 Control D5 Mono Pressure6 Poly Pressure7 LFO 18 LFO 29 Auxiliary Envelope10 Function Generator 111 Function Generator 212 Free-run Function Generator

Page 269: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 245

MIDI SPECIFICATION

• Patchcord DestinationsThe MIDI patchcord destination numbers are unique across all Proteustype products. Note-on and realtime numbers are shared. The chartshows whether a cord is available to note-on (NO) realtime (RT) orboth. The patchcord destinations available to Morpheus are as follows:

MIDI Description NO/RTValue Availability0 Off RT/NO1 Pitch RT/NO2 PitchP RT/NO3 PitchS RT/NO4 Volume RT/NO5 VolumeP RT/NO6 VolumeS RT/NO7 Attack RT/NO8 AttackP RT/NO9 AttackS RT/NO10 Decay RT/NO11 DecayP RT/NO12 DecayS RT/NO13 Release RT/NO14 RelP RT/NO15 RelS RT/NO16 XFade RT/NO17 Lfo1Amt RT/NO18 Lfo1Rt RT/NO19 Lfo2Amt RT/NO20 Lfo2Rt RT/NO21 AuxAmt RT/NO22 AuxAtt RT/NO23 AuxDec RT/NO24 AuxRel RT/NO25 Start NO26 StartP NO27 StartS NO28 Pan RT/NO29 PanP RT/NO30 PanS RT/NO31 Tone NO

Page 270: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual246

MIDI SPECIFICATION

MIDI Description NO/RTValue Availability32 ToneP NO33 ToneS NO34 Morph RT/NO35 MorphP RT/NO36 MorphS RT/NO37 Trans2 NO38 Trans2P NO39 Trans2S NO40 PortRt RT/NO41 PortRtP RT/NO42 PortRtS RT/NO43 FG1Amt RT/NO44 FG2Amt RT/NO45 FltLev NO46 FltLevP NO47 FltLevS NO48 FreqTrk NO49 FreqTrkP NO50 FreqTrkS NO

• Function Generator ShapesThe function generator shapes are as follows:

MIDI ShapeValue Name0 Linear1 Expo+12 Expo+23 Expo+34 Expo+45 Expo+56 Expo+67 Expo+78 Circ1.49 Circ1.610 Circ1.811 Cir1.16

MIDI ShapeValue Name12 Squeeze13 FastLn114 FastLn215 FastLn316 MedLn117 MedLn218 SlwRmp119 SlwRmp220 Bloom21 Bloom222 Cr1.16R23 Cir1.8R

Page 271: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 247

MIDI SPECIFICATION

MIDI ShapeValue Name24 Cir1.6R25 Cir1.4R26 SlwCrv127 SlwCrv228 DelayDC29 DCdelay30 Curve2X31 Curv2XB32 Curv2XC33 ZizZag134 ZizZag235 ZizZag336 Chaos0337 Chaos0638 Chaos1239 Chaos1640 Chaos2541 Chaos3342 Chaos37

MIDI ShapeValue Name43 Chaos5044 Chaos6645 Chaos7546 Chaos9547 Chaos9948 LinShfl49 LnShfl250 RandomA51 RandomB52 RandomC53 RandomD54 RandomE55 RandomF56 RandomG57 RandomH58 RandomI59 RandomJ60 RandomK61 RandomL62 RandomZ

• Function Generator ConditionsThe function generator condition values are shared between presetfuncgens and hyper funcgens, though some values are excluded in thehyper func gen. The chart shows the numbers and the availability.

MIDI Description AvailabilityValue0 Never Preset, Hyperpreset1 AlwaysEnd Preset, Hyperpreset2 NoteOnEnd Preset, Hyperpreset3 NoteOnImm Preset, Hyperpreset4 NoteOffEnd Preset, Hyperpreset5 NoteOffImm Preset, Hyperpreset6 LFO1End Preset7 LFO2End Preset8 Footswitch1End Preset, Hyperpreset9 Footswitch1Imm Preset, Hyperpreset

Page 272: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual248

MIDI SPECIFICATION

MIDI Description AvailabilityValue10 Footswitch2End Preset, Hyperpreset11 Footswitch2Imm Preset, Hyperpreset12 Footswitch3End Preset, Hyperpreset13 Footswitch3Imm Preset, Hyperpreset14 VelocityEnd Preset15 KeyEnd Preset

• Function Generator LevelsThe funcgen level parm value is comprised of two bitfields.

Funcgen Level = (levelType << 8) + levelValuebits 8-13 = level type, 0-3bits 0-7 = level value, +-127

The level types are defined as follows:

MIDI DescriptionValue0 absolute level1 delta level2 random absolute level3 random delta level

• Filter TypesUse the FILTER LIST command to get a list of the currently availablefilter names, ids and transform number. the filter type number sentvia sysex are unique ids. (they are not the index into the screens) Thetransform number is used to determine the active parms for that filter.The number of parms active for any filter is determined by the num-ber of frames in the filter.

Number of ActiveFrames Parms2 Morph4 Morph, Frequency Track6 Morph, Frequency Track, Transform 28 Morph, Frequency Track, Transform 2

Page 273: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 249

MIDI SPECIFICATION

Transform Filter Type0 2 frame filter1 4 frame “square” filter2 6 frame “phantom cube” filter3 8 frame “cube” filter4 unused5 4 frame “square” filter, gain reduced

• Effect TypesUse the EFFECT LIST command to get a list of the currently availableEFFECTS and their IDs. The effect type number sent via SysEx areunique IDs. (they are not the index into the screens). Note that the Aand B effect IDs do not overlap. e.g. the A effect StereoFlange does nothave the same ID as the B effect StereoFlange.

• Parameter NumbersThe following parameter numbers are in decimal.

Parm Parm RangeNumber Description0-128 Proteus Preset Parms256 Basic Channel 0-15257 Channel Volume 0-127258 Channel Pan ± 7, -8 = P259 Current Program 0-MAXPROGRAM260 Master Tune ± 64 Semitones261 Master X-pose ± 12 Midi Keys (semitones)262 Global Bend 0-12 ± Semitones263 Global Velcurve 0-8, 0 = Off264 Midi Mode 0-3, Omni, Poly, Multi, Mono265 Unused266 Control A 0-31267 Control B 0-31268 Control C 0-31269 Control D 0-31270 Footswitch 1 64-79271 Footswitch 2 64-79272 Footswitch 3 64-79273 Midi Modechange Enable0-1, Disabled, Enabled

Page 274: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual250

MIDI SPECIFICATION

Parm Parm RangeNumber Description274 SysEx Device ID 0-15... Unused320 Current Midimap 0-MAXMAP... Unused323 Auto Select 0-1, Off, On324 Packet Delay 0-999 (approx. 600 µSecs/unit)325 Proteus SysEx 0-1, Off, On326 Compare Mode 0-1, Off, On.. Unused2048-2407 Midimap Vers. 1 Parms See MIDIMAP DATA8192-8469 Preset Vers. 1 Parms See PRESET DATA8704-8940 Hyper Vers. 1 Parms See HYPERPRESET DATA

• Instrument NumbersUse the INSTRUMENT LIST commands to get a list of the IDs andnames as they appear in the box. Instrument numbers are comprisedof two bitfields. (romset<<8) + index.

bits 8-13 = romset number.

bits 0-7 is an index into the romset.

The Morpheus romset is 7. (Therefore instrument numbers start at1792).

• Program NumbersThe mapping of program numbers for preset changes and midimapprogram number editing is as follows:

MIDI Program ProgramBank Numbers Type0 0-127 RAM Presets1 128-255 ROM Presets2 256-383 RAM Hypers3 383-511 Card Presets4 512-639 Card Hypers

Page 275: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 251

SYSEX TUTORIAL

• 14-bit Signed 2's Complement NumbersIf the data value is negative, you must first take the 2's complement ofthe number: In the case of a 14-bit number this is equivalent to add-ing 16384 to the original negative value.

To fit the 7-bit MIDI protocol, numbers must be “nibble-ized”.

To get the 14-bit nibble-ized value (of a positive value or a 2'scomplemented negative value):

msb = value DIV 128 (divide and ignore the remainder)

lsb = value MOD 128 (divide and use only the remainder)

To go the other way (convert 14 bit signed 2's complement to a signedreal number)

raw Value = (msb*128) + lsb (gives you the unsigned raw value)

if raw Value ≥ 8192 (8192 = 2^13)

then signed Value = raw value - 16384 (16384 = 2^14)

Example: To find the “nibble-ized” Hex value of -127:

1) -127 + 16384 = 16257

2) 16257 ÷ 128 = 127 r-1

3) 127 in Hex = 7F = msb

4) 1 in Hex = 01 = lsb

5) Parameter value would be transmitted as 01 7F

Example: To find the “nibble-ized” Hex value of parameter number257:

1) 257 ÷ 128 = 2 r-1

2) 2 in Hex = 02 = msb

3) 1 in Hex = 01 = lsb

4) Parameter number would be transmitted as 01 02

00000000 00000000

data bits data bits

StatusBit

StatusBit

Status Bit MUST be “0”in MIDI data bytes.

Page 276: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual252

SYSEX TUTORIAL

••• In all of these examples,the process of Hexadecimalconversion has been omitted.Use a table or a Hex calcula-tor to convert decimalnumbers to Hexadecimal.

HOW TO EDIT AN INDIVIDUAL PRESET PARAMETERParameter data editing is accomplished using the format described onpage 234.

F0 System Exclusive Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product ID Bytedd Device ID 0-15 (usually 00)03 Command ID - Parameter Data (from Command Summary)pl Parameter Number ls bytepm Parameter Number ms bytevl Parameter Value ls bytevm Parameter Value ms byteF7 EOX

Example: Change the waveshape of LFO 1 to Random.

1) Find the command ID for the operation you wish to perform from theCommand Summary on page 227 (03 = Parameter Data).

2) Next, we need to find the preset parameter number for LFO 1 wave-shape in Hexadecimal. This will be the Parameter Number portion ofthe message.

The preset parameter offset numbers shown on pages 229-231 must be addedto the base offsets in order to get the actual parameter number.

3) The preset parameter list shows LFO 1 waveshape as 93 (page 229). Thebase offset number for preset parameters is 8192 (page 250). Add thesenumbers to get the actual parameter number. 8192 + 93 = 8285.

4) Now the parameter number must be converted into 14-bit 2’s comple-ment in order to fit into the MIDI format. The instructions are given onthe previous page, but we will go through the process again.

a) 8285 ÷ 128 = 64 r93

b) 64 in Hex = 40 = msb

c) 93 in Hex = 5D = lsb

5) The least significant byte is always sent first. The MIDI SysEx string nowlooks like this: F0 18 0C 00 03 5D 40 XX XX F7. We’re still missing thevalue data to select the desired waveform.

6) From the table on page 229 you can find out that “0” corresponds tothe random wave. Zero is the easiest number to convert. 0 in 14-bit 2’scomplement is still 0, or more strictly speaking 00 00.

7) The completed message is: F0 18 0C 00 03 5D 40 00 00 F7.

8) If we wanted to change the waveform to Square, the message would be:F0 18 0C 00 03 5D 40 04 00 F7. Substitute 04 00 for 00 00 in the databytes (lsb first).

Page 277: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 253

SYSEX TUTORIAL

HOW TO EDIT A GLOBAL PARAMETERParameter data editing is accomplished using the format described onpage 234.

F0 System Exclusive Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product ID Bytedd Device ID 0-15 (usually 00)03 Command ID - Parameter Data (from Command Summary)pl Parameter Number ls bytepm Parameter Number ms bytevl Parameter Value ls bytevm Parameter Value ms byteF7 EOX

Example: Change the Pan value of the Basic channel to “P”.

1) We need to find the preset parameter number for Channel Pan inHexadecimal. This will be the Parameter Number portion of the mes-sage.

The Channel Pan parameter is found on page 249. This is the actualnumber and not an offset, so we only need to convert it to 14-bit 2’scomplement. The parameter number for Channel Pan = 258.

a) 258 ÷ 128 = 2 r2

b) 2 in Hex = 02 = msb

c) 2 in Hex = 02 = lsb

2) The least significant byte is always sent first. The MIDI SysEx string nowlooks like this: F0 18 0C 00 03 02 02 XX XX F7. We’re still missing thevalue data to select the pan position.

3) From the table on page 249 you can find out that “-8” corresponds toPreset Pan. For negative numbers, add 16384 to the original negativevalue. 16384 - 8 = 16376.

4) Next we convert this number into “nibblized” Hex form.

a) 16376 ÷ 128 = 127 r120

b) 127 in Hex = 7F = msb

c) 120 in Hex = 78 = lsb

5) The completed message is: F0 18 0C 00 03 02 02 78 7F F7.

One MoreIf we wanted to change the Basic Channel to 5, the message would be:F0 18 0C 00 03 00 02 04 00 F7. Basic Channel is two parameters beforePan in the list, Subtract 2 from the Parameter Number (02 02 - 2 = 0002). MIDI channels begin at 00; therefore channel 5 would be 4.Convert 4 into Hex = 04. (LSB first = 04 00.)

••• See MIDI Mode in theMaster Menu for additionalinformation on Device ID.

••• Note: Changing BasicChannel Pan is the same aschanging Midimap Pan.

Page 278: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual254

SYSEX TUTORIAL

••• In all of these examples,the process of Hexadecimalconversion has been omitted.Use a table or a Hex calcula-tor to convert decimalnumbers to Hexadecimal.

HOW TO EDIT A MIDIMAP PARAMETERBy popular request we’ll offer one more example. Editing a Midimap isjust another type of parameter data editing. The number given for theparameters is an OFFSET which will be added to the base number forMidiMap given on page 250. The format for parameter editing is the sameas always.

F0 System Exclusive Status Byte18 E-mu Mfg. ID0C Morpheus Product ID Bytedd Device ID 0-15 (usually 00)03 Command ID - Parameter Data (from Command Summary)pl Parameter Number ls bytepm Parameter Number ms bytevl Parameter Value ls bytevm Parameter Value ms byteF7 EOX

Example: Change the Amount of FX A to 50%.

1) Find the command ID for the operation you wish to perform from theCommand Summary (03 = Parameter Data).

2) Next, we need to find the Midimap parameter number for FXA Amountin Hexadecimal. This will be the Parameter Number portion of themessage.

The Midimap parameter offset numbers shown on pages 233-234 must beadded to the base offset in order to get the actual parameter number.

3) The Midimap parameter list shows FXA Amount as 355 (page 234). Thebase offset number for Midimap parameters is 2048 (page 250). Addthese numbers to get the actual parameter number. 2048 + 355 = 2403.

4) Now the parameter number must be converted into 14-bit 2’s comple-ment in order to fit into the MIDI format. These instructions were givenearlier, but we'll go through the process one more time.

a) 2403 ÷ 128 = 18 r99

b) 18 in Hex = 12 = msb

c) 99 in Hex = 63 = lsb

5) The least significant byte is always sent first. The MIDI SysEx string nowlooks like this: F0 18 0C 00 03 63 12 XX XX F7. We’re still missing thevalue data to set the Amount.

6) From the table on page 234 we see that the FXA Amount range is0-100%. Simply insert the desired amount in Hexadecimal.50 in Hex = 32, or 00 32.

7) The completed message is (lsb first): F0 18 0C 00 03 63 12 32 00 F7.

••• See MIDI Mode in theMaster Menu for additionalinformation on Device ID.

Page 279: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 255

INDEX

A“A” effects list 42A-B-C-D controllers 24, 97-98, 122-124About sampling 9Aftertouch 71Alternate volume envelope 73, 105, 143Attack 73, 144Audio outputs 5, 6Auto select 26Auxiliary envelope 73, 116

B“B” effects list 53B3 waves 167Bandpass filter 85Bank select 33Basic channel 22Basic channel, changing via SysEx 253Basic operation 11Basic setup 5

CCard slot 12Chamber reverb 43, 44Channel -> Preset/Hyper 31Channel pan 14Channel volume 14Chorus 49Compare 26, 59, 101Conditional jump 120Connections 5-8Continuous controller 97Contour See Envelope GeneratorController ABCD 24, 71Copy 131Copy button 13Cross delay 53Cross-switch 111Cross-switch point 113Crossfade 111Crossfade amount 112Crossfade balance 112Crossfade direction 112Crossfade mode 111Cursor 13

DData entry control 13DCA 93Decay 73, 144Delay 50, 53 73Delay times, envelope 222Demo sequence select 13Demo sequences 16Dimensions: 223Double + Detune 106, 144Drawbar diagrams 169Drum priority 110

EEarly reflection 43Editing presets 69, 139Effect bus architecture 40Effect processor A 34Effect processor B 35Effect returns 8EffectsEffects location 39Effect output routing 40Effect programming 41Envelope 143, 144Envelope generator 71, 73Envelope generator times 222

FFactory presets 162-163

RAM presets 162ROM presets 163

Feedback 47Filter 84-92, 113, 154, 157Filter frequency tracking 114Filter level 113, 151Filter modulation 84Filter reverse 116Filter transform 2 115Filter type 152Fine pitch tuning 105First note priority 110Flanger 46Footswitch 72Footswitch control 124Free-run function generator 64, 65,81Frequency tracking 114, 151

Page 280: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual256

INDEX

F (cont)Function generator 71, 76, 118

Conditional jumps 66, 77Delta level 79Pitch intervals 222Random delta 81Random level 79

Function generator amount 121Function generator curves 214-221Fuzz 54Fuzz lite 54FX A 34FX A Amount, changing via SysEx 254FX amount 35FX B 35FX output select 36

GGlide See PortamentoGlobal velocity curve 20

HHall 43, 44Harmonic waveforms 163Headphones 5High note priority 110High pass filter 85Hold 73, 144Home/Enter 13Hyperpreset 4, 59

Portamento mode 64Preset to zone assignment 60Zone key range 61Zone pan 61Zone pitch tune 63Zone transpose 63Zone velocity offset 63Zone velocity range 62Zone volume 61

Hyperpreset menu select button 12Hyperpreset name 60

IID number 22Instruments 4, 93,140, 162-166

KKey number 96Key rangeKey velocity 71Keyboard center 126Keyboard key 71Keyboard pressure 71Keyboard tuning 126

19-tone tuning 126Equal tuning 126Gamelan 126Just C tuning 126Vallotti tuning 126

LLast note priority 110Layered keyboard 104LFO 47, 75, 147

Amount 117Delay 117Rate 117Shape 117Variation 117

LFO waveRandom 75Sawtooth 75Sine 75Square 75Triangle 75

Loop enable 108Loop offset 108Loop size 108Loop start 108Loop offset sample locations 211-213Low frequency oscillator 71, 75Low note priority 110Low pass filter 85

MMain controls 12, 13Master 19, 20Master menu select button 12Master tune 19Master menu 17, 57, 129Memory card 15MIDI

MIDI basic channel 22MIDI activity LED 13

Page 281: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 257

INDEX

M (cont)MIDI basic channel 22MIDI channel selection 14MIDI controller amount 124MIDI controller assign 24MIDI enables 32MIDI footswitch control 24MIDI implementation chart 223MIDI in 5, 6, 7MIDI mode 22MIDI mode change 22MIDI modes 22MIDI out 6MIDI program change map 23MIDI realtime controls 97MIDI specifications 224-254MIDI sysex 226-254MIDI sysex tutorial 251-254MIDI sysex packet delay 25

Midimap 29Midimap pan 31Midimap volume 31

Midimap menu select button 12Midimap name 31Midimap select 15, 30Midipatch 72, 97Mix select 127Modulation 70Modulation sources 71, 95, 123Mono mode 22MorphMorph offset 114, 151Multi mode 22Multi-timbral operation 16

NNontranspose 108Notch filter 86Note-on modulation control 71, 94, 122

OOrgan waveforms 164Omni mode 22Only, effect mode 35Output impedance: 223Output level: 214Output mix 31

PPan 61, 93Parametric filters 87Percussion instrument locations 170-173Percussion instruments 168Performance setup 7Phaser 48Pitch tune 63Pitch wheel 124Pitch bend range 124Pitch wheel 71Plates, reverb 43Poles 86Poly mode 22Polyphonic key pressure 71Portamento 110Portamento mode 64, 111Portamento rate 110Portamento shape 110Power 8Power requirements: 223Power switch 13Preset 4Preset menu 101Preset menu select button 12Preset name 102Presets 160Pressure amount 124Primary alternate envelope 106Primary key range 104Primary filter type 113Primary instrument 102Program map select 34Program selection 14Programming basics 67Proteus sysex 26

QQ 86

RRain 43Realtime control 97Realtime modulation 71, 95, 123, 149Reference section 159Release 73, 144Reverb 42, 43Ring modulator 55

Page 282: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual258

INDEX

SSample rate 214Sampled sounds listing 164sampling 9Save 147Save hyperpreset 66Save midimap 36Save preset 127Secondary alternate envelope 106Secondary filter type 113Secondary key range 104Secondary instrument 102Send MIDI data 24Setup 5Sequencer, using Morpheus 158-159Shimmer 43Solo mode 109Solo mode priority 110Sound delay 107, 145Sound reverse 107Sound splicing 146Sound start 107, 145Split keyboard 104Studio setup 6Sub 1 & 2 8Sustain 73, 144Synth mode 109Synthesizer waves 166Sysex 24, 226-254

TTap level 50Technical specifications 223Tone 84, 93Tone filter 84, 93Transform 2 152Transpose 19, 63, 105Tremolo 75Tuning

Coarse & fine tuning 63, 105Tuning to other instruments 19User key tuning 20, 126

UUser key tuning 20

VVelocity curve 96, 125Velocity offset 63Velocity range 62Vibrato 75Viewing angle 26Volume 61, 103, 141Volume Control 12

WWeight: 222Wind mode 109

ZZ-plane filter 84, 89, 93, 151Z-plane filter descriptions 174-210Zone 4, 59

110/220 8

Page 283: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Chapter 11: Reference Section 259

Please read this warranty, as it gives you specific legal rights.

Length of WarrantyThis warranty covers all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of oneyear from the date of purchase by the original owner, provided that the WarrantyRegistration Card is filled out and returned to E-mu Systems within 14 days from thedate of purchase. Cases may arise where E-mu's Service Department or one of E-mu'sauthorized service centers will ask for a copy of your sales receipt to facilitate war-ranty service. Please keep your purchase receipt in a safe place.

E-mu Systems does not cover:

• Damages due to improper or inadequate maintenance, accident, abuse, misuse,alteration, unauthorized repairs, tampering, or failure to follow normal operatingprocedures as outlined in the owner's manual.

• Deterioration or damage of the cabinet.

• Damages occurring during any shipment of the product for any reason.

• An E-mu product that has in any way been modified by anyone other than E-muSystems, Inc.

Limitation of Implied WarrantiesNo warranty is expressed or implied. E-mu Systems specifically disclaims the impliedwarranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Exclusion of Certain DamagesE-mu Systems' liability for a product found defective is limited to repair or replace-ment of the unit, at E-mu's option. In no event shall E-mu Systems be liable fordamages based on inconvenience, whether incidental or consequential, loss of use ofthe unit, loss of time, interrupted operation or commercial loss, or any other conse-quential damages.

Some states do not allow limitation of the duration of implied warranties or the exclusion orlimitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations and exclusionsmay not apply to you.

How To Obtain Warranty ServiceAll E-mu products are manufactured with the highest standards of quality. If you findthat your instrument does require service, it may be done by an authorized E-muservice center. If you are unable to locate a service center in your area, please contactE-mu Systems Service Department at (408) 438-1921. They will either refer you to anauthorized service center or ask that you return your instrument to the factory.When returning an instrument to the factory, you will be issued a Return Authoriza-tion number (RA). Please label all cartons, shipping documents and correspondencewith this number. E-mu suggests you carefully and securely pack your instrument forreturn to the factory. Mark the outside of the shipping carton clearly with your RAnumber. Send to E-mu Systems, Inc. 1600 Green Hills Road, Scotts Valley, California,95066. You must pre-pay shipping charges to the service location. E-mu Systems willpay return shipping fees. You will be responsible for any damage or loss sustainedduring shipment in any direction.

11/92

WARRANTY

Page 284: MORPHEUS - e-UniverCity.com · 2011-09-27 · Morpheus is a registered trade-mark of E-mu Systems, Inc. Important Notice: In order to obtain warranty service on your Morpheus unit,

Morpheus Operation Manual260

NOTES